2007 Saturn AURA Owner Manual M - my.gm.com · How to Use This Manual Many people read the owner...

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 16Safety Belts ............................................ 18Child Restraints ...................................... 40Airbag System ........................................ 69Restraint System Check ......................... 88

Features and Controls ................................ 91Keys ....................................................... 93Doors and Locks .................................. 102Windows ............................................... 108Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 112Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 116Mirrors .................................................. 132OnStar® System ................................... 135

Universal Home Remote System .......... 139Storage Areas ...................................... 152Sunroof ................................................ 154

Instrument Panel ....................................... 157Instrument Panel Overview ................... 160Climate Controls ................................... 177Warning Lights, Gages,

and Indicators ................................... 187Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 204Audio System(s) ................................... 217

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 245Your Driving, the Road,

and Your Vehicle .............................. 246Towing ................................................. 284

2007 Saturn AURA Owner Manual M

1

Service and Appearance Care .................. 295Service ................................................. 297Fuel ...................................................... 299Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 306Bulb Replacement ................................ 344Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .... 347Tires ..................................................... 348Appearance Care .................................. 382Vehicle Identification ............................. 390Electrical System .................................. 391Capacities and Specifications ................ 401

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 403Maintenance Schedule .......................... 404

Customer Assistance Information ............. 421Customer Assistance and Information ..... 422Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 434Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ..... 436

Index .......................................................... 439

2

SATURN and the SATURN Emblem are registeredtrademarks, and the name AURA is a trademarkof Saturn Corporation. GENERAL MOTORSand GM are registered trademarks of GeneralMotors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes after that time without furthernotice.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle for quickreference.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15864099 B Second Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle to learn about the vehicle’s featuresand controls. Pictures and words work togetherto explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. A box with the word CAUTION is used totell about things that could hurt you or others if youwere to ignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

We tell you what the hazard is and what to do tohelp avoid or reduce the hazard. Please readthese cautions. If you do not, you or others couldbe hurt.

A circle with a slashthrough it is a safetysymbol which means“Do Not,” “Do Notdo this” or “Do Not letthis happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsYou will also find notices in this manual.

Notice: These mean there is something thatcould damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. The notice tells what to do to help avoidthe damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehiclewhich use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 9Manual Seats ................................................ 9Power Seats ............................................... 10Manual Lumbar ........................................... 10Heated Seats .............................................. 11Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 12Head Restraints .......................................... 15Power Lift Seat ........................................... 16

Rear Seats .................................................... 16Split Folding Rear Seat ............................... 16

Safety Belts .................................................. 18Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 18Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 22How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 23Driver Position ............................................. 24Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 31

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 32Right Front Passenger Position ................... 32Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 33Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 36Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 39Safety Belt Extender ................................... 39

Child Restraints ............................................ 40Older Children ............................................. 40Infants and Young Children ......................... 43Child Restraint Systems .............................. 47Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 52Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 54Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 62Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 64

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Airbag System .............................................. 69Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 72When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 75What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 77How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 78What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 78Passenger Sensing System ......................... 80

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 86Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 87Restraint System Check ............................... 88

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 88Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 89

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

8

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

Lift the bar located under the front of the seat tounlock it. Slide the seat to where you want itand release the bar. Try to move the seat withyour body to be sure the seat is locked in place.

9

Power Seats

In vehicles with power seats, the controls used tooperate them are located on the outboard sideof the seat.

To adjust the seat, do any of the following:• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding

the control forward or rearward.• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion

by moving the front of the control up or down.• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion

by moving the rear of the control up or down.

Manual LumbarOn vehicles with thisfeature, the handle islocated on the outboardside of the seat.

Move the handle up repeatedly to decreaselumbar support. Move the handle down repeatedlyto increase lumbar support.

10

Heated SeatsYour vehicle may have heated front seats.

The buttons are locatedon the outboard side ofthe driver’s and frontpassenger’s seats.

Press the top of the switch to turn thefeature on. The seat will heat to the highsetting. The indicator light above the switch willbe lit next to the number 2.

Press the top of the switch again to go to the lowheat setting. The indicator light will be lit nextto the number 1.

Press the bottom of the switch to turn thefeature off.

The heated seat feature will turn off when theignition is turned off.

11

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you do notwant to. Adjust the driver’s seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

On seats with manual reclining seatbacks,the lever used to operate them is located on theoutboard side of the seat.

12

To recline the seatback, do the following:1. Lift the recline lever.2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then

release the lever to lock the seatback in place.3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure

it is locked.To return the seatback to an upright position,do the following:1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to

the seatback and the seatback returns to theupright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

If the seats have power reclining seatbacks,the control used to recline them is located on theoutboard side of the seat behind the powerseat control.• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the

control rearward.• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of

the control forward.

13

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

14

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the restraint upto raise it. To lowerthe head restraint,press the button,located on the topof the seatback,and push therestraint down.

The rear seat head restraints are also adjustable.

15

Power Lift Seat

To adjust a power lift seat up or down:

1. Move the seat forward or rearward to thedesired position.

2. Press the top or bottom of the power lift seatswitch, located on the outboard side of thedriver’s seat, to raise or lower the seat.

See Manual Seats on page 9.

Rear Seats

Split Folding Rear SeatWith this feature, you can fold either side of theseatback down for more cargo space. Make surethe front seat is not reclined. If it is, the rearseatback will not fold down all the way.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

16

To lower the rear seatback, pull on the seat tablocated on the outboard side of the seatbackcushion and fold the seatback down. This allowsyou direct access to the trunk.

To raise the rear seatback, follow these steps:

1. Raise the seatback up and make sure it latches.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to be sure it islocked in position.

3. Make sure that the safety belts are properlystowed over the seatback in all three positions.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed,not properly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure thatthe safety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

When the seat is not in use, it should be kept inthe upright locked position.

17

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you andyour passengers to buckle your safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 189and Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Lighton page 190.

18

In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts. Here is why:They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you dohave a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

19

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider does not stop.

20

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

21

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

22

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 40 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 43. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

23

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 39.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.See Shoulder Belt Height Adjustmenton page 31.

24

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop orcrash.

25

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

26

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

27


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

28


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.It should be worn over the shoulder atall times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

29


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask yourretailer to fix it.

30

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on thebuckle. The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltadjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. The beltshould be away from your face and neck, but notfalling off your shoulder. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

To move it down,squeeze the buttons (A)on the sides of theheight adjuster andmove the heightadjuster to the desiredposition.

You can move the adjuster up just by pushing upon the shoulder belt guide.

After you move the adjuster to where you want it,try to move it down without squeezing thebuttons to make sure it has locked into position.

31

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as lowas possible, below the rounding, throughoutthe pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it ismore likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key tomaking safety belts effective is wearing themproperly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 24.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor the following.

If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt outall the way, you will engage the child restraintlocking feature. If this happens, just let the belt goback all the way and start again.

When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latchplate up the safety belt webbing. The latchplate should rest on the stitching on the safetybelt, near the guide loop.

32

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash.And they can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across

you. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.

33

When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 39.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

The lap part of the belt should be worn lowand snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.In a crash, this applies force to the strongpelvic bones. And you would be less likely toslide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,the belt would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.

34

The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body. To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

35

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed on a shoulderbelt, the comfort guide positions the belt awayfrom the neck and head.

There is one guide for each outboardpassenger position in the rear seat.

Here is how to install a comfort guide to thesafety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between theedge of the seatback and the interior bodyto remove the guide from its storage clip.

36

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt.The elastic cord must be under the belt.Then, place the guide over the belt and insertthe two edges of the belt into the slots ofthe guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

37

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn maynot provide the protection needed in acrash. The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 33. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Pull the guide upward toexpose its storage clip, and then slide theguide onto the clip. Turn the guide and clip inwardand slide them in between the seatback andthe interior body, leaving only the loop ofthe elastic cord exposed.

38

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontaland near frontal crash if the threshold conditionsfor pretensioner activation are met. And, if yourvehicle has side impact airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten the safety belts ina side crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate ina crash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 89.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your retailerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. To helpavoid personal injury, do not let someone elseuse it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit.The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,just attach it to the regular safety belt. For moreinformation, see the instruction sheet that comeswith the extender.

39

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

40

{CAUTION:

Never do this.Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the center ofthe vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 36. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safety beltbuckle. In either case, be sure that theshoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, sothat in a crash the child’s upper body wouldhave the restraint that belts provide.

41

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

42

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

43

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesnot weigh much — until a crash. During acrash a baby will become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it. For example, in a crashat only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg)baby will suddenly become a 240 lb(110 kg) force on a person’s arms. A babyshould be secured in an appropriaterestraint.

44

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

45

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particular child restraint.In addition, there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, the backand shoulders. Infants always should besecured in appropriate infant restraints.

46

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed.A young child’s hip bones are still sosmall that the vehicle’s regular safety beltmay not remain low on the hip bones, asit should. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure.This alone could cause serious or fatalinjuries. Young children always should besecured in appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

47

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraintwith the seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

48

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

49

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installed inthe vehicle using the vehicle’s safety beltor LATCH system, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle.Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of alap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system.

See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 54 for more information.A child can be endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

50

Securing the Child Within theChild RestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

51

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than thefront seat.

We recommend that children be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a child riding in aforward-facing child seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal and seat-mountedside impact airbag (if equipped) if thesystem detects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deploy

CAUTION: (Continued)

52


under some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin a rear seat, even if the airbag(s) are off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

If you need to secure more than one child restraintin the rear seat, review the following illustrations.Depending on where you place the child restraintor the size of the child restraint, you may notbe able to access certain safety belt assemblies orLATCH anchors for additional passengers orchild restraints.

Configurations for Use of Two ChildRestraints

A. Child restraint usingLATCH

B. Occupant prohibited

A. Occupant prohibitedB. Child restraint using

LATCH

A. Child restraint usingLATCH

B. No occupantrecommended

C. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

53

Configurations for Use of Three ChildRestraints

A. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

A. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

B. Child restraint usingLATCH

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraintcan move around in a collision or sudden stopand injure people in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint in yourvehicle — even when no child is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicleand attachments on the child restraint thatare made for use with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or use thevehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a top tether,you must also use either the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure the child restraint.A child restraint must never be installed using onlythe top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturerwill provide you with instructions on how touse the child restraint and its attachments.

54

The following explains how to attach a childrestraint with these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether to theanchor.

55

Some child restraints with top tethers aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. In theUnited States, some child restraints also havea top tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit isavailable.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

Rear Seat

56

To assist you in locating the lower anchors,each rear anchor position has a label, near thecrease between the seatback and the seatcushion, showing where the anchors are located. The top tether anchors are located behind the rear

seat on the filler panel.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 52 for additional information.

57

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash.A child or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

58

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehicle hasone, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow the instructionsof the child restraint manufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

If you need to secure more than one child restraintin the rear seat, see Where to Put the Restrainton page 52. Depending on where you placethe child restraint, you may not be able to accesscertain safety belt assemblies or LATCHanchors for additional passengers or childrestraints.

59

You cannot secure three child restraints using theLATCH anchors in the rear seat at the sametime, but you can install two of them. If you wantto do this, install one LATCH child restraint inthe passenger-side position, and install the otherone either in the driver-side position or in thecenter position. Refer to the following illustration tolearn which anchors to use.

A. Passenger Side Rear Seat Lower AnchorsB. Center Rear Seat Lower AnchorsC. Driver Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors

Make sure to attach the child restraint at theproper anchor location.

This system is designed to make installation ofchild restraints easier. When using lower anchors,do not use the vehicle’s safety belts. Insteaduse the vehicle’s anchors and child restraintattachments to secure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicle anchor tosecure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint tothe lower anchors.

60

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. If the position you are using has an

adjustable head restraint, raise it.See Head Restraints on page 15.

2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tetheraccording to the child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a singletether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint andyou are using a singletether, route thetether under the headrestraint and in betweenthe head restraintposts. See HeadRestraints on page 15.

61

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint andyou are using a dualtether route thetether under the headrestraint and in betweenthe head restraintposts. See HeadRestraints on page 15.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 54.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

62

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

63

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 54.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a saferplace to secure a forward-facing child restraint.See Where to Put the Restraint on page 52.

64

In addition, your vehicle has a passengersensing system. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbagwhen an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or asmall child in a forward-facing child restraintor booster seat is detected. See PassengerSensing System on page 80 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 191 for more informationon this, including important safety information.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never puta rear-facing child seat in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facing child is sogreat, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:




Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal and seat-mountedside impact airbag if the system detects arear-facing child restraint, no system isfail-safe, and no one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbags are off.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 54.

65

There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the toptether must be anchored. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 54 ifthe child restraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

Your vehicle has airbags. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 80. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured in a rearseat, even if the airbags are off. If your childrestraint is forward-facing, move the seat as farback as it will go before securing the child restraintin this seat.

1. Move the seat as far back as it will go beforesecuring the forward-facing child restraint.See Manual Seats on page 9 or Power Seatson page 10.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and seat-mounted side impactairbag, the off indicator on the passengerairbag status indicator should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 191.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

66

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

67

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.


If the airbags are off, the off indicator will be litand stay lit when you start the vehicle.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove thechild restraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe child restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with your dealer/retailer.

To remove the child restraint, unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger. When the safety belt is not in use,slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing.The latch plate should rest on the stitching on thesafety belt, near the guide loop.

68

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has the following airbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for thedriver.

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for theright front passenger.

• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for thedriver and passenger directly behind the driver.

• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the rightfront passenger and the person seated directlybehind that passenger.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts, but do notreplace them.

69

{CAUTION:

Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes. They are not designed to inflate inrollover, rear crashes, or in many sidecrashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags androof-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle. They are not designed toinflate in frontal, in rollover or in rearcrashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

70

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer the best protection for adults,but not for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system norits airbag system is designed for them.Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint system canprovide. Always secure children properlyin your vehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 40 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 43.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there isan electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 190 for more information.

71

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

72

The seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driveris in the side of the driver’s seatback closest tothe door.

The seat-mounted side impact airbag for the rightfront passenger is in the side of the passenger’sseatback closest to the door.

73

The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driverand the person seated directly behind the driveris in the ceiling above the side windows.

The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the rightfront passenger and the person seated directlybehind that passenger is in the ceiling above theside windows.

74

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the airbag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbagmust be kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. Never secureanything to the roof of your vehicle byrouting the rope or tie-down through anydoor or window opening. If you do, thepath of an inflating airbag will be blocked.Do not let seat covers block the inflationpath of a side impact airbag. The path ofan inflating airbag must be kept clear.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderateto severe frontal or near-frontal crashes.But they are designed to inflate only if the impactexceeds a predetermined deployment threshold.Deployment thresholds take into account a varietyof desired deployment and non-deploymentevents and are used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflateand help restrain the occupants. Whether yourfrontal airbags will or should deploy is not basedon how fast your vehicle is traveling. It dependslargely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,and how quickly your vehicle slows down.

75

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. Your vehicle has electronicfrontal sensors, which help the sensing systemdistinguish between a moderate frontal impact anda more severe frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level lessthan full deployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of yourvehicle goes straight into a wall that does notmove or deform, the threshold level for thereduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for afull deployment is about 18 to 25 mph(29 to 40.2 km/h). The threshold level can vary,however, with specific vehicle design, so that itcan be somewhat above or below this range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms,the airbags could inflate at a differentcrash speed than if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight intothe object.

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

76

The side impact airbags are intended to inflate inmoderate to severe side crashes. A side impactairbag will inflate if the crash severity is abovethe system’s designed “threshold level.”The threshold level can vary with specific vehicledesign. Side impact airbags are not intendedto inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. A side impact airbag isintended to deploy on the side of the vehiclethat is struck, unless the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the passenger’sseat-mounted side impact airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 80 for more information.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply because ofthe damage to a vehicle or because of whatthe repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflationis determined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicleslows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts.For side impact airbags, inflation is determined bythe location and severity of the impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, airbag and related hardwareare all part of the airbag modules. Frontalairbag modules are located inside the steeringwheel and the instrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags, there arealso airbag modules in the side of the frontseatbacks closest to the door. For vehicles withroof-mounted side impact airbags, there arealso airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side window.

77

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contactthe steering wheel or the instrument panel.In moderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.Airbags supplement the protection providedby safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually.But the frontal airbags would not help you inmany types of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Side impact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including many frontal ornear frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions for vehicles with sideimpact airbags.

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates?After frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impactairbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quicklythat some people may not even realize an airbaginflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbagsmay still be at least partially inflated minutes afterthe vehicle comes to rest. Some componentsof the airbag module — the steering wheel hub forthe driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for theright front passenger’s bag, the side of theseatback closest to the door for the seat-mountedside impact airbags, and the area along theceiling of your vehicle near the side windows forroof-mounted side impact airbags — may behot for a short time. The parts of the airbag thatcome into contact with you may be warm, but nottoo hot to touch. There may be some smokeand dust coming from the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driverfrom seeing out of the windshield or being ableto steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent peoplefrom leaving the vehicle.

78

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, andturn the hazard warning flashers on when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn theinterior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controls for those features.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate theairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After an airbag inflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system. If you do not getthem, the airbag system will not be there to helpprotect you in another crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules and possibly otherparts. The service manual for your vehiclecovers the need to replace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy on page 436 and Event DataRecorders on page 437.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag systems. Improper service can meanthat an airbag system will not work properly.See your dealer/retailer for service.

79

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system forthe right front passenger’s position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visible when you startyour vehicle in the instrument panel.

The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for onand off, will be visible during the system check.When the system check is complete, eitherthe word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol foron or the symbol for off, will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 191.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works with sensorsthat are part of the right front passenger’s seat andsafety belt. The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than thefront seat.

We recommend that children be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a child riding in aforward-facing child seat; an older child ridingin a booster seat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

United States Canada

80

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal and seat-mountedside impact airbag if the system detects a



rear-facing child restraint, no system isfail-safe, and no one can guarantee thatan airbag will not deploy under someunusual circumstance, even though it isturned off. We recommend that rear-facingchild restraints be secured in the rearseat, even if the airbags are off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

81

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impact airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit to remind you thatthe airbags are off. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 191.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe child restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 64.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.

82

If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraintson page 15.

Remove any additional material from the seatcushion before reinstalling or securing thechild restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle, and check with your dealer/retailer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbaganytime the system senses that a person ofadult size is sitting properly in the right frontpassenger’s seat. When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbags to be enabled,the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind youthat the airbags are active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag, depending uponthe person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbagfor that person.

83

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remain in this positionfor two to three minutes. This will allow thesystem to detect that person and then enablethe right front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Safety belts help keep the passenger in positionon the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking,which helps the passenger sensing systemmaintain the passenger airbag status. See “SafetyBelts” and “Child Restraints” in the Index foradditional information about the importance ofproper restraint use.

84

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system.If this ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right front passenger’sseat may not have the protection of theairbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 190 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

A thick layer of additional material, such as ablanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment suchas seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagerscan affect how well the passenger sensingsystem operates. You may want to consider notusing seat covers or other aftermarket equipment.See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 87 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

85

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your retailer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchasea service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 435.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

86

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors.If you have any questions about this,you should contact Customer Assistancebefore you modify your vehicle. The phonenumbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedure onpage 422.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, overhead console, ceilingheadliner, ceiling and pillar garnish trim,roof-mounted airbag modules, or airbag wiringcan affect the operation of the airbag system.If you have questions, call CustomerAssistance. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 422.

87

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job,have it repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Care of Safety Belts on page 385 for moreinformation.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,and have them repaired or replaced. The airbagsystem does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,or the airbag covering on the driver’s andright front passenger’s seatback, or the sideimpact airbag covering on the ceiling near theside windows, the bag may not work properly.You may have to replace the airbag modulein the steering wheel, both the airbag moduleand the instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s airbag, the airbag module andseatback for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s seat-mounted side impact airbags,or side impact airbag module and ceilingcovering for the roof-mounted side impactairbag. Do not open or break the airbagcoverings.

88

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help make sureyour restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new beltsor LATCH system parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.

If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collisiondamage may also mean you may need to haveLATCH system, safety belt or seat parts repaired orreplaced. New parts and repairs may be necessaryeven if the belt or LATCH system was not beingused at the time of the collision.If an airbag inflates, you will need to replaceairbag system parts. See the part on the airbagsystem earlier in this section.If an airbag inflates, you may also need to replacethe driver’s and right front passenger’s safetybelt assemblies. Be sure to do so. Then the newassemblies will be there to help protect you ina collision.After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt assemblies,even if the airbags have not deployed. Have yoursafety belt pretensioners checked if your vehiclehas been in a collision, or if your airbag readinesslight stays on after you start your vehicle orwhile you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 190.

89

✍ NOTES

90

Keys .............................................................. 93Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 94Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ................................................. 96Doors and Locks ........................................ 102

Door Locks ................................................ 102Power Door Locks ..................................... 103Door Ajar Reminder .................................. 103Delayed Locking ........................................ 103Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 104Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 105Lockout Protection ..................................... 106Trunk ........................................................ 106

Windows ...................................................... 108Power Windows ........................................ 109Sun Visors ................................................ 111

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 112Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 112PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 114PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 114

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 116New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 116Ignition Positions ....................................... 117Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 118Starting the Engine .................................... 118Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .......... 120Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 120Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 122Parking Brake ........................................... 127Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 128Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 129Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 130Engine Exhaust ......................................... 130Running the Engine While Parked ............. 131

Mirrors ......................................................... 132Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 132Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® .......... 132Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® and Compass ................... 133Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 135

Section 2 Features and Controls

91

OnStar® System .......................................... 135Universal Home Remote System ................. 139

System Identification .................................. 139Universal Home Remote System ............... 140Universal Home Remote System Operation

(With One Triangular LED) ...................... 140Universal Home Remote System

Operation (With Three Round LED) ....... 145

Storage Areas ............................................. 152Glove Box ................................................. 152Cupholder(s) .............................................. 152Center Console Storage Area .................... 153Convenience Net ....................................... 153

Sunroof ....................................................... 154Sunroof - Panoramic ................................. 155

Section 2 Features and Controls

92

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windowswill function with the keys in the ignitionand they could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys in a vehiclewith children.

93

One key is used for the ignition and all locks.

When a new vehicle is delivered to the dealer/retailer, the key has a key tag. This tag has abar-coded key code that tells your dealer/retailerhow to make extra keys. This tag may be removedand kept by your dealer/retailer. If it has not beenremoved, keep the tag in a safe place. If you loseyour key, your dealer/retailer can easily makeanother one by using the key code. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 427 for moreinformation.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemYour vehicle may have a Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) system. The RKE system operates ona radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

94

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range.This is normal for any remote keyless entrysystem. If the transmitter does not work or if youhave to stand closer to your vehicle for thetransmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few steps tothe left or right, hold the transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 96.

• If you are still having trouble, see your retaileror a qualified technician for service.

95

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked,and the trunk can be opened from about 3 feet(1 m) up to 197 feet (60 m) away with the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. If your vehiclehas the remote vehicle start feature, you can alsostart the vehicle’s engine with the RKE transmitter.

The following functions may be available if yourvehicle has the remote keyless entry system.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle hasthis feature, the engine may be started fromoutside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter.See “Remote Vehicle Start” later in this section formore detailed information.

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all thedoors. The interior lamps turn off after all ofthe doors are closed. If enabled through theDriver Information Center (DIC), the remote lockfeedback can be programmed to have thehorn chirp and/or the turn signals flash when theRKE transmitter is used to lock the vehicle’s doors.See “LOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” underDIC Vehicle Personalization on page 211 for moreinformation.

Pressing the lock button may also arm the contenttheft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 112.

Remote Keyless Entrywith Remote Start

Remote Keyless Entrywithout Remote Start

96

K (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock thedriver’s door. If the button is pressed againwithin five seconds, all remaining doors unlock.The interior lamps turn on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.If enabled through the DIC, the remote unlockfeedback can be programmed to have thehorn chirp and/or the turn signals flash when theRKE transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle’sdoors. See “UNLOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH”under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 211for more information.

If enabled through the DIC, and it is dark enoughoutside, the vehicle’s high-beam headlamps,parking lamps, and back-up lamps turn on eachtime the unlock button on the transmitter is pressed.These exterior lamps stay on for 20 seconds, oruntil a door is opened. See “EXT (Exterior)LIGHTS” under DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 211 for additional information.

Pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitterdisarms the content theft-deterrent system.See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 112.

V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold thisbutton for about one second to open the trunk.The trunk can be opened with the transmitter whenthe vehicle speed is less than 2 mph (3 km/h) orwhen the ignition is off.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press andrelease this button to locate your vehicle. The hornsounds three times and the headlamps and turnsignals flash three times. Press and hold thebutton for about three seconds to initiate the panicalarm. The horn sounds and the headlampsand turn signals flash for 30 seconds. Press thebutton again to cancel the panic alarm.

Matching Transmitter(s) to Your VehicleEach RKE transmitter is coded to prevent anothertransmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased through your retailer. Remember tobring any remaining transmitters with you whenyou go to your retailer. Each vehicle can havea maximum of four transmitters matched to it.

97

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your RKEtransmitter should last about four years.

The battery is weak if the transmitter will not workat the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitterworks, it is probably time to change the battery.

If the battery is low, a KEY FOB BATT (Battery)LOW message will display in the vehicle’s DIC.

Notice: When replacing the battery, usecare not to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter. To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter do

the following:

1. Insert a flat object, with a thin edge, into thenotch located below the vehicle locator/panicalarm button, and separate the bottomhalf from the top half of the transmitter.

2. Remove the battery and replace it with thenew one. Make sure the positive (+) side ofthe battery faces up. Use one three-volt,CR2032, or equivalent, type battery.

98

3. Put the two halves back together. Make surethe cover is on tight, so water does not getinside the transmitter.

4. Test the operation of the transmitter withthe vehicle.

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remote starting featurethat allows you to start the engine from outside thevehicle. It may also start the vehicle’s heating or airconditioning systems and rear window defogger.When the remote start system is active and thevehicle has an automatic climate control system,it will automatically regulate the inside temperature.Normal operation of the system will return after theignition key is turned to ON.

Laws in some communities may restrict the use ofremote starters. For example, some laws mayrequire a person using remote start to havethe vehicle in view when doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements on remote startingof vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicleis low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

You can start your vehicle’s engine from about197 feet (60 m) away. However, the range may beless while the vehicle is running, and as a resultyou may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn itoff than you were to turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter, see RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 94 foradditional information.

99

/ (Remote Start): If your vehicle has the remotestart feature, the RKE transmitter will have abutton with this symbol on it.

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,do the following:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lockbutton, then immediately press and holdthe transmitter’s remote start button until thevehicle’s turn signal lamps flash.When the vehicle starts, the parking lampsturn on and remain on while the engineis running.If it is the first remote start since the vehiclehas been driven, repeat these steps, while theengine is still running, to extend the enginerunning time by 10 minutes. Remote start canbe extended one time.

After entering the vehicle during a remote start,insert and turn the key to ON to drive the vehicle.

The engine will shut off automatically after10 minutes, unless a time extension has beendone or the vehicle’s key is inserted into theignition switch and turned to ON.

To manually shut off a remote start, do any of thefollowing. The parking lamps turn off to indicatethe engine is off.

• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle andpress and release the remote start button.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Turn the ignition switch ON and then OFF.

100

The remote start feature provides two separatestarts per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutesof engine running time.

If the remote start procedure is used again beforethe first 10 minute time frame has ended, thefirst 10 minutes will immediately expire andthe second 10 minute time frame will start.

After your vehicle’s engine has been startedtwo times using the remote vehicle start button,the vehicle’s ignition must be turned to ONusing the key before the remote start procedurecan be used again. See Ignition Positions onpage 117 for information regarding the ignitionpositions on your vehicle.

The remote vehicle start feature will not operate ifany of the follow occur:

• The remote start system is disabled throughthe DIC.

• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.

• The vehicle’s hood is open.

• The hazard warning flashers are on.

• The check engine light is on. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 199.

• The engine coolant temperature is too high.

• The oil pressure is low.

• Two remote vehicle starts have already beenprovided for that ignition cycle.

Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start featureare shipped from the factory with the remotestart system enabled. The system may be enabledor disabled through the DIC. See “REMOTESTART” under DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 211 for additional information.

101

Doors and LocksDoor Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

From the outside, use your key or Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle has one.Turn the key counterclockwise to unlock the door.

From the inside, lock and unlock the door bymoving the manual lock knob down and up, or byusing the power door lock switches.

102

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switches are located on thedriver’s and front passenger’s door.

Press the top of the switch to unlock all doors.Press the bottom of the switch to lock all doors.

The rear doors do not have power door lockswitches. Rear seat passengers must usethe manual lock knob on their doors.

Door Ajar ReminderIf one of the doors is not fully closed while theignition is on and the shift lever is moved out ofPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) the following will occur:

• A chime will sound.• The DOOR AJAR message will display

through the Driver Information Center (DIC)until the door is closed. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 206.

Delayed LockingThis feature allows the driver to delay the locking ofthe vehicle. It will not operate with the key in theignition. See Lockout Protection on page 106.

Press the driver’s power door lock switch or theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lockbutton once. With the key removed from theignition and the driver’s door open, the followingoccurs:• Three chimes sound to signal the delay.• All doors will lock and the turn signals flash

once five seconds after the last door hasbeen closed.

• The horn chirps if the horn chirp feature isenabled. See DIC Vehicle Personalizationon page 211.

103

If a door is opened before the five seconds haselapsed, the doors do not lock until five secondsafter all doors are closed.

If the power door lock switch or the transmitterlock button is pressed twice when leavingthe vehicle, the doors lock immediately.

If the power door unlock switch or the transmitterunlock button is pressed, the doors unlockimmediately and do not lock automatically afterthe doors are closed.

This feature is turned on at the factory but may beturned off through the Driver Information Center(DIC). See DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 211.

Programmable Automatic DoorLocksYour vehicle is programmed at the factory to lock alldoors automatically when the following are met:

• All doors are closed.

• The ignition is on.

• The shift lever is moved out of PARK (P).

This feature cannot be disabled.

When the shift lever is moved back to PARK (P),all doors will unlock.

If someone needs to exit the vehicle once thedoors are locked, have that person use the manuallock knob or power door unlock switch.

The power door unlock function can beprogrammed through prompts displayed on theDriver Information Center (DIC). These promptsallow you to choose unlock settings. See DICVehicle Personalization on page 211.

104

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has rear door security locks.These prevent passengers from opening the reardoors from the inside.

The rear door securitylocks are located on theinside edge of eachrear door.

The rear doors must be open to access them.The label showing lock and unlock positionsis located near the lock.

To set the locks, do the following:1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and

turn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

When you want to open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door by lifting the rear doormanual lock, using the power door lock switch,or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter, if the vehicle has one.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the security lock slotand turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.

Security Lock Labelshown

105

Lockout ProtectionThis feature prevents the driver’s door from beinglocked using the power door locks, if the key isleft in the ignition and a door is open.

Press the power door lock switch to lock all thedoors and then unlock the driver’s door.

Press and hold the power door lock switch formore than three seconds to override this feature.

If the key is removed from the ignition, or ifthe manual door lock or the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter is used, the key could stillbe locked inside the vehicle. Always rememberto take the key with you.

TrunkTo open the trunk from the outside, press thetrunk release button on the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with thetrunk lid open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle.You cannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.If you must drive with the trunk lid openor if electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle.See Climate Control System.

• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open them allthe way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 130.

106

Remote Trunk ReleasePress the button locatedon the driver’s doornear the map pocket toopen the trunk.

The trunk can only be opened while the vehicle isin PARK (P).

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunk as itcould damage the handle. The emergencytrunk release handle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk, enablingthem to open the trunk from the inside.There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunkrelease handle located inside the trunk onthe trunk latch. This handle glows followingexposure to light. Pull the release handle up toopen the trunk from the inside.

107

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

108

Power WindowsThe power windowswitches are located onthe armrest on thedriver’s door. In addition,each passenger doorhas a switch for itsown window.

Express-Down WindowThe driver’s window has an express-down feature.This switch is labeled AUTO. Press the front ofthe switch part way, and the driver’s window opensa small amount. If the front of the switch ispressed all the way down and released, thewindow goes all the way down automatically.

To stop the window while it is lowering, pull thefront of the switch momentarily. To raise thewindow, pull and hold the front of the switch.

Express-Up WindowYour vehicle may have this feature on the driver’swindow. Pull the switch up to the secondposition and release the switch to activate theexpress-up feature. To stop the window asit is raising, pull up or press down briefly on theswitch again.

109

Programming the Power WindowsIf the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,disconnected, or is not working, you will needto reprogram the driver’s power window for theexpress-up feature to work. Replace or rechargethe vehicle’s battery before reprogramming.

To program the driver’s window, follow these steps:

1. With the ignition in ACC, ON, or whenRetained Accessory Power (RAP) is active,close all doors.

2. Press and hold the power window switch untilthe window is fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch up until thewindow is fully closed.

4. Continue holding the switch up forapproximately two seconds after the windowis completely closed.

The window is now reprogrammed.

Express Window Anti-Pinch FeatureIf any object is in the path of the window when theexpress-up is active, the window stops at theobstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factoryposition. Weather conditions such as severe icingmay also cause the window to auto-reverse.The window returns to normal operation once theobstruction or condition is removed.

Express Window Anti-Pinch Override

{CAUTION:

If express override is activated, thewindow will not reverse automatically.You or others could be injured and thewindow could be damaged. Before youuse express override, make sure that allpeople and obstructions are clear of thewindow path.

110

In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can beoverridden in a supervised mode. Hold the windowswitch all the way up to the second position.The window rises for as long as the switch is held.Once the switch is released, the express modeis re-activated.

In this mode, the window can still close on anobject in its path. Use care when using theoverride mode.

Window LockoutThe driver’s power window controls also include alockout button.

o (Window Lockout): Press the lockout buttonto stop the rear passengers from using theirwindow switches. The driver and front passengercan still operate all the windows with the lockon. When the red part of the switch is visible youhave returned to normal window operation.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, you can swing down thevisors. You can also remove them from the centermount and swing them to the side, to block outglare from the side.

Your vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrorslocated on the passenger and driver’s side visor.When you lift the cover, the light will turn on.

111

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothingwe put on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle may havea content theft-deterrentalarm system.

Arming the SystemWith the ignition off, you can arm the systemby pressing the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter lock button.

The system will arm thirty seconds after all thedoors are closed, or sixty seconds with anydoor open.

If you press the lock button on the transmitter asecond time while all the doors are closed,the system will arm immediately. The systemwill still arm in sixty seconds if a door is open.When the open door is closed, the systemwill arm.

The security light, located on the instrument panelcluster, comes on to indicate that arming hasbeen initiated. Once the system is armed,the security light will flash once everythree seconds.

If the security light is flashing twice per second,this means that a door is open.

If you do not want to arm the system, lock the carwith the lock levers on the doors.

112

Disarming the SystemTo disarm the system:

• Press the RKE transmitter unlock button.

• Turn the ignition to ON to disarm the system.

Once the system is disarmed, the security light willstop flashing.

How the System Alarm is ActivatedTo activate the system if it is armed:

• Open the driver’s door or trunk. This willcause a ten second pre-alarm chirp followedby a thirty second full alarm of horn and lights.

• Open any other door. This will immediatelycause a full alarm of horn and lights forthirty seconds.

• Open the hood. If the vehicle has the remotestart feature, it will activate the full alarm.

When an alarm event has finished, the system willre-arm itself automatically.

How to Turn Off the System AlarmTo turn off the system alarm:

• Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.The system will then re-arm itself.

• Press the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter. This will also disarm the system.

• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on.This will also disarm the system.

How to Detect a Tamper ConditionIf you hear three chirps when the unlock or lockbutton is pressed on the RKE transmitter, it meansthat the content theft security system alarm waspreviously triggered.

113

PASS-Key® III+The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.


1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:




PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequencytransponder in the key that matches a decoder inyour vehicle.

PASS-Key® III+ OperationYour vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System) theft-deterrentsystem. PASS-Key® III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system. This means you do nothave to do anything special to arm or disarm thesystem. It works when you insert or removethe key from the ignition.

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it preventsthe vehicle from starting. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start the vehicle will bediscouraged because of the high number ofelectrical key codes.

114

When trying to start the vehicle if the engine doesnot start and the security light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on, the key may have adamaged transponder. Turn the ignition off andtry again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be not damaged, try another ignitionkey. At this time, you may also want to check thefuse, see Fuses on page 392. If the engine stilldoes not start with the other key, your vehicleneeds service. If your vehicle does start, the firstkey may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who canservice the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new keymade. In an emergency, contact RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 427.

It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoderto “learn” the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to 10 keys may beprogrammed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keys only.If your vehicle was first sold in Canada, or if allthe currently programmed keys are lost or do notoperate, you must see your dealer/retailer or alocksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to havekeys made and programmed to the system.

See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who canservice PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank thatis cut exactly as the ignition key that operatesthe system.

To program the new key:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stampedon it.

2. Insert the already programmed key in theignition and start the engine. If the enginewill not start, see your dealer/retailer forservice.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toOFF, and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it tothe ON position within five seconds of theoriginal key being turned to the OFF position.The security light will turn off once the keyhas been programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keysare to be programmed.

115

If you are ever driving and the security light comeson and stays on, you may be able to restartyour engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+system, however, is not working properly andmust be serviced by your dealer/retailer.Your vehicle is not protected by thePASS-Key® III+ system at this time.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key® III+ to have a newkey made.

Do not leave the key or device that disarmsor deactivates the theft deterrent system inthe vehicle.

Starting and OperatingYour VehicleNew Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).Do not make full-throttle starts. Do notexceed 5,000 engine rpm. Avoiddownshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timethe new brake linings are not yet broken in.Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline every timeyou get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in.See Towing a Trailer on page 287 for thetrailer towing capabilities of your vehicleand more information.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

116

Ignition PositionsWith the key in theignition switch, you canturn it to four differentpositions.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key fromthe ignition switch could cause damageor break the key. Use the correct key and turnthe key only with your hand. Make sure thekey is in all the way. If none of this works, thenyour vehicle needs service.

9 (OFF): This is the only position from whichyou can remove the key. It also locks the ignitionand transaxle. A warning chime sounds if thedriver’s door is opened while the ignition is off andthe key is left in the ignition.

ACC (ACCESSORY): This position lets you usethings like the radio and windshield wiperswhile the engine is not running.

Use this position if your vehicle must be pushed ortowed, but never try to push-start your vehicle.See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 284.

R (ON): This position unlocks the ignition.It is also the position to where the key returnsafter you release the switch and the engine starts.The switch will stay in this position while theengine is running. But even while the engine is notrunning, you can use ON to operate the electricalaccessories, and to display some instrumentpanel warning lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACC or ON position with the engine off.You might not be able to start your vehicle if thebattery is allowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

/ (START): This position starts the engine.When the engine starts, release the key.The ignition switch will return to the ON positionfor normal driving.

117

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime sounds, when the driver’s door isopened. Always remember to remove the key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This locks yourignition and transaxle. Also, always rememberto lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if the key is left inthe ignition while your vehicle is parked. You mightnot be able to start your vehicle after it hasbeen parked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)These vehicle accessories can be used for up to10 minutes after the engine is turned off:• Audio System• Power Windows• Heated Seats (if equipped)• Sunroof (if equipped)

These features continue to work up to 10 minutesafter the ignition is turned to OFF.

The power windows, heated seats, and sunroofwill work until any door is opened.

The radio continues to work until the driver’s dooris opened.

All these features operate when the key is in theON or ACC.

Starting the EnginePlace the transaxle in the proper gear.

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).Your engine will not start in any other position – thisis a safety feature. To restart when you are alreadymoving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shift intoPARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediately after starting it.

118

Operate the engine and transaxle gently toallow the oil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assistsin starting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key is turned to theSTART position, and then released whenthe engine begins cranking, the enginewill continue cranking for a few seconds oruntil the vehicle starts. If the engine does notstart and the key is held in START formany seconds, cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent cranking motordamage. To prevent gear damage, this systemalso prevents cranking if the engine isalready running. Engine cranking can bestopped by turning the ignition switch to theACC or OFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key in START for up toa maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly but then stopsagain, do the same thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transaxle gently until theoil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour retailer. If you do not, your engine mightnot perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.

119

Adjustable Throttle and Brake PedalIf your vehicle has this feature, you can changethe position of the throttle and brake pedals.This feature is designed for shorter drivers, sincethe pedals cannot move farther away from thestandard position, but can move rearwardfor better pedal reach.

The ignition must be off or the vehicle in PARK (P)for this feature to work. The feature will not workif your foot is pushing on the throttle or brakepedal. Remove your foot from the pedalsand press the switch again.

The switch used toadjust the pedalsis located on theleft side of theinstrument panel.

The adjustable pedal feature is meant to be usedwith the adjustable seat and adjustable steeringwheel controls to reach a safe and comfortableposition.

Adjust the throttle and brake pedals to reach acomfortable and safe operating position by pushingthe right and left arrow to move the pedalseither closer or further from your body.

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have this feature. In very coldweather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolantheater can provide easier starting and betterfuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, thecoolant heater should be plugged in a minimumof four hours prior to starting your vehicle.At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of thecoolant heater is not required. Your vehicle mayalso have an internal thermostat in the plug end ofthe cord. This will prevent operation of theengine coolant heater when the temperature is ator above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.

120

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The engine coolant heater cord islocated near the air cleaner box on thepassenger side of the engine compartment.See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 308 for more information on location.

3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-voltAC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact yourretailer in the area where you will be parking yourvehicle. The dealer/retailer can give you thebest advice for that particular area.

121

Automatic Transaxle Operation

Your automatic transaxle has a shift lever locatedon the console between the seats.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.It is the best position to use when you start yourengine because your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P).See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 128.If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 287.

XE Model XR Model

122

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transaxle shift lock control system.You have to apply your regular brake first and thenpress the shift lever button before you can shiftfrom PARK (P). If you cannot shift out ofPARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever andthen push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P)as you maintain brake application. Then pressthe shift lever button and move the shift lever intoanother gear.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transaxle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice, or sand without damaging yourtransaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 278.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed is dangerous.Unless your foot is firmly on the brakepedal, your vehicle could move veryrapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift into a drivegear while your engine is running at highspeed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running athigh speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not running athigh speeds when shifting your vehicle.

123

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.If you need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), push youraccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down.

Notice: If your vehicle seems to accelerateslowly or not shift gears when you go faster,and you continue to drive your vehicle thatway, you could damage the transaxle.Have your vehicle serviced right away.You can drive in LOW (L) when you are drivingless than 35 mph (56 km/h) and DRIVE (D)for higher speeds until then.

Downshifting the transaxle in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, See “Skidding”under Loss of Control on page 263.

INTERMEDIATE (I): This position, available onthe XE model, is also used for normal driving.However, it reduces vehicle speed withoutusing your brakes for slight downgradeswhere the vehicle would otherwise acceleratedue to steepness of grade. If constant upshiftingor downshifting occurs while driving up steephills, this position can be used to preventrepetitive types of shifts. You might chooseINTERMEDIATE (I) instead of DRIVE (D) whendriving on hilly, winding roads and when towinga trailer, so that there is less shifting betweengears.

LOW (L): This position, available on theXE model, gives you even more engine brakingbut lower fuel economy than INTERMEDIATE (I).You can use LOW (L) on hills. It can help controlyour speed as you go down steep mountain roads,but then you would also want to use your brakesoff and on. You can use LOW (L) on verysteep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shiftlever is put in LOW (L), the transaxle will not shiftinto first gear until the vehicle is going slowlyenough.

124

Notice: If you drive in LOW (L) for more than25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph(90 km/h), you could damage your engineand/or transaxle. Use DRIVE (D) orINTERMEDIATE (I) as much as possible.Shift into LOW (L) only if your vehicle is goingslower than 65 mph (105 km/h).

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage the transaxle.If you are stuck, do not spin the tires.When stopping on a hill, use the brakes tohold the vehicle in place.

MANUAL (M): This position, available on theXR model, allows you to change gears similar to amanual transaxle. If your vehicle has this feature,see TAP-shift.

TAP-shiftTo use this feature, do the following:1. Move the shift lever from DRIVE (D) rearward

to MANUAL (M).While driving in manual mode, the transaxle willremain in the driver selected gear. When comingto a stop in the manual position, the vehicle willautomatically shift into FIRST (1) gear.

2. Press the (+) plus paddle located on top ofthe steering wheel controls forward toupshift, or push the backside of the shiftpaddle rearward to downshift.

125

The Driver Information Center (DIC) in theinstrument cluster will change from the currentlydisplayed message to the letter “M”, For MANUALposition, and a number indicating the requestedgear range when moving the shift lever forward orrearward.

While using the TAP-shift feature the transaxle willhave firmer shifting and sportier performance.You can use this for sport driving or when climbinghills to stay in gear longer or to downshift formore power or engine braking.

The transaxle will only allow you to shift into gearsappropriate for the vehicle speed and enginerevolutions per minute (RPM):

• The transaxle will not automatically shift tothe next higher gear if the engine RPM istoo high.

• The transaxle will not allow shifting to the nextlower gear if the engine RPM is too high.

SECOND (2) /THIRD (3) Gear StartFeatureNotice: If you attempt a third gear start whiletrailering or towing a heavy load, you willnotice reduced engine power. This couldoverheat and damage your transaxle. Do notattempt a third gear start while traileringor towing your vehicle.If your vehicle has the 6-speed transaxle, whenaccelerating your vehicle from a stop in snowyand icy conditions, you may want to shift intoSECOND (2), or THIRD (3) gear. A higher gear,and light application of the gas pedal, may allowyou to gain more traction on slippery surfaces.With the TAP-shift feature, the vehicle canaccelerate from a stop in SECOND (2) orTHIRD (3).1. Move the shift lever from DRIVE (D) into the

MANUAL (M) position.2. With the vehicle stopped, press the plus (+)

paddle forward to select SECOND (2) orTHIRD (3) gear. The vehicle will startfrom a stop position in SECOND (2) orTHIRD (3) gear.

3. Once the vehicle is moving select the desireddrive gear.

126

Parking BrakeTo set the parkingbrake, push down theparking brake pedal withyour left foot. If theignition is on, the brakesystem warning lightwill come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Lighton page 194.

To release the parking brake, hold the regularbrake pedal down with your right foot. Push downmomentarily on the parking brake pedal withyour left foot until you feel the pedal release. If theparking brake is not released when you begin todrive, the brake system warning light will beon and a chime will sound warning you that theparking brake is still on.

The PUSH PARK PEDAL message will alsoappear in the Driver Information Center (DIC) toremind you to release the parking brake. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 206.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light is offbefore driving.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill,see Towing a Trailer on page 287.

127

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right footand set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressingthe button on the shift lever while pushing theshift lever all the way toward the front ofthe vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you

can leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and the parking brake is firmly set before leavingit. After moving the shift lever into PARK (P),hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see ifyou can move the shift lever away from PARK (P)without first pushing the shift lever button.

If you can, it means that the shift lever was notfully locked in PARK (P).

128

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shift thetransaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight ofthe vehicle can put too much force on the parkingpawl in the transaxle. It could be difficult to pullthe shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called“torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, setthe parking brake and then shift into PARK (P)properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To findout how, see Shifting Into Park (P) on page 128.

When you are ready to drive, move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) before you release theparking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you might need to haveanother vehicle push your vehicle a little uphillto take some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transaxle, this should let you pull the shiftlever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lockcontrol system.

To shift out of PARK (P):

1. Apply the regular brake pedal.

2. Then press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.

If you are still unable to shift out of PARK (P):

1. Fully release the shift lever button.

2. While holding down the brake pedal, pressthe shift lever button again.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.

If you still cannot move the shift lever fromPARK (P), consult your dealer/retailer.

129

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.You might have exhaust coming in if:

• The exhaust system sounds strangeor different.

• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when

driving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or the exhaust system

has been modified improperly.If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

130

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running.But if you ever have to, here are some thingsto know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 130.Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 274.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 128.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling atrailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 287.

131

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorWhen you are sitting in a comfortable drivingposition, adjust the mirror so you can see clearlybehind your vehicle. Hold the mirror in thecenter to move it up or down and side to side.The day/night adjustment allows you to adjust themirror to avoid glare from the lamps behindyou. Push the tab forward for daytime use andpull it for nighttime use.

Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar®

When you are sitting in a comfortable drivingposition, adjust the mirror so you can see clearlybehind your vehicle. Hold the mirror in thecenter to move it up or down and side to side.The day/night adjustment allows you to adjust themirror to avoid glare from the lamps behindyou. Push the tab forward for daytime use andpull it for nighttime use.

There are also OnStar® buttons located at thebottom of the mirror face. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribeto OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 135for more information about the services OnStar®

provides.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on themirror housing.

132

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar® and CompassYour vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror with a compass and OnStar®.The automatic dimming feature enables the mirrorto sense nighttime glare from vehicle headlampsfrom behind and automatically dim to reducethe glare to a safe level. The automatic dimmingfeature turns on each time the vehicle is started.

O: This is the on/off button.

Press and hold the on/off button until the indicatorlight located to the left of the button goes outindicating the feature is off. To turn the featureback on, press and hold the on/off button until theindicator light comes on.

There are also OnStar® buttons located at thebottom of the mirror face. See your retailerfor more information on the system and how tosubscribe to OnStar®. See OnStar® Systemon page 135 for more information about theservices OnStar® provides.

Compass OperationPress the on/off button once to turn the compasson or off.

When the ignition and the compass feature areon, the compass will show two character boxes fora few seconds. After a few seconds, the mirrorwill display the current compass direction.

Compass CalibrationIf after a few seconds the display does not show acompass direction, (N for North for example),there may be a strong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Such interference may becaused by a magnetic antenna mount, note padholder, or similar object. If the letter C appearsin the compass window, the compass may need tobe reset or calibrated.

The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehiclein circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

133

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.If the mirror is not adjusted for compassvariance, the compass could give false readings.

The mirror is set in zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass variance ifthe vehicle is driven outside zone eight. Undercertain circumstances, such as a long distance,cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust thecompass variance.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the zone map that follows.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zonenumber appears on the display.

3. Once the zone number appears on thedisplay, press the on/off button quicklyuntil you reach the correct zone number.If C appears in the compass window,the compass may need calibration. See“Compass Calibration” listed previously.

134

Outside Power MirrorsThe controls for theoutside power mirrorsare located on the insideof the vehicle nearthe driver’s side mirror.

Use the selector switch located above the four-waycontrol panel to choose either the left or rightoutside mirror. Then press the control pad to movethe selected mirror in the desired direction.Adjust each mirror so you can see the side ofyour vehicle and the area beside and behind yourvehicle.

Heated Outside MirrorsIf your vehicle has this feature, the surface of theoutside mirrors will heat when the rear windowdefogger is activated. See “Rear WindowDefogger” under Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 181 for more information.

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

135

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancelyour OnStar® service at any time by contactingOnStar®. A complete OnStar® Owner’s Guide andthe OnStar® Terms and Conditions are included inthe vehicle’s OnStar® Subscriber glove boxliterature. For more information, visit onstar.com oronstar.ca, contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or pressthe OnStar® button to speak with an OnStar®

advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & SoundPlan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan isincluded for one year from the date of purchase.You can extend this plan beyond the first year,or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.

For more information, press the OnStar® button tospeak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar®.

Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

136

Available Services included with Directions& Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling isfully integrated into the vehicle, and can be usedwith OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or aBell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending oneligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®

Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speakwith an OnStar® advisor by pressing theOnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutesto access location-based weather, local trafficreports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phonebutton and giving a few simple voice commands,you can browse through the various topics.See the OnStar® Owner’s Guide for moreinformation (Only available in the continental U.S.).

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 241 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

137

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services,your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capabilityof recording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to anOnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®

button press, Emergency button press or ifyour airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicleinformation usually includes your GPS locationand, in the event of a crash, additional informationregarding the accident that your vehicle hasbeen involved in (e.g. the direction from whichyour vehicle was hit). When you use the VirtualAdvisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPSlocation so that we can provide you withlocation-based services.

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service in thatarea. OnStar® service also cannot work unlessyou are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that areahas coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technologythat is compatible with the OnStar® service.

Not all services are available everywhere,particularly in remote or enclosed areas, or atall times.OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by your dealer/retailer. If the lightappears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®

subscription has expired. You can always pressthe OnStar® button to confirm that your OnStar®

equipment is active.

138

Universal Home Remote System

System IdentificationYour vehicle may have a Universal HomeRemote System.

Determine which Universal Home Remote yourvehicle has and then read the pages followingfor instructions on programming your specificsystem.

If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode(LED) indicator light above the Universal HomeRemote buttons, follow the instructions underUniversal Home Remote System Operation(With One Triangular LED).

If there are three round LED indicator lights abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED).

For help or information on the Universal HomeRemote System, call the customer assistancephone number under Customer Assistance Officeson page 426.

139

Universal Home Remote SystemThe Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage door openers,security systems, and home lighting.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause interference.2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.


Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With One Triangular LED)

If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode(LED) indicator light above the Universal HomeRemote buttons, follow the instructions below.

Do not use the Universal Home Remote withany garage door opener that does not havethe stop and reverse feature. This includesany garage door opener model manufacturedbefore April 1, 1982. If you have a newer garagedoor opener with rolling codes, please be sureto follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete theprogramming of your Universal Home RemoteTransmitter.

140

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote.Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful tohave another person available to assist you inthe programming steps.

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use inother vehicles as well as for future UniversalHome Remote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed Universal Home Remotebuttons should be erased for security purposes.See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons”later in this section.

When programming a garage door, it is advised topark outside of the garage. Be sure that peopleand objects are clear of the garage door orgate operator you are programming.

It is recommended that a new battery beinstalled in your hand-held transmitter forquicker and more accurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the Universal HomeRemote SystemTo program up to three devices:

1. Press and hold down the two outsideUniversal Home Remote buttons, releasingonly when the Universal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttonsfor longer than 30 seconds and do notrepeat this step to program a secondand/or third hand-held transmitter to theremaining two Universal Home Remotebuttons.

2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away fromthe Universal Home Remote buttonswhile keeping the indicator light in view.

141

3. At the same time, press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote button andthe hand-held transmitter button. Do notrelease the buttons until Step 4 has beencompleted.Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first andthen rapidly after Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Release bothbuttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.

If the indicator light stays on continuously,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase allof the programmed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to a constantlight, continue with Steps 6 through 8following to complete the programming ofa rolling-code device, most commonly,a garage door opener.

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually befound where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

142

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and holdthe programmed Universal Home Remotebutton for two seconds, then release it.Immediately press and hold the same buttona second time for two seconds, thenrelease it. Immediately, press and hold thesame button a third time for two seconds,then release.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate the rolling-code device.

To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do notrepeat Step 1, as this will erase all previousprogramming from the Universal Home Remotebuttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.

143

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signalis being transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons:1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons

until the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in the training(learning) mode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with Step 2 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” shown earlier in thissection.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but theycan be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming aSingle Universal Home Remote Button” followingthis section.

Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the UniversalHome Remote button, proceed with Step 2under “Programming Universal Home Remote”shown earlier in this section.


144

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there are three round LightEmitting Diode (LED) indicator lights abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions below.

This system provides a way to replace up tothree remote control transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home automation devices.

Do not use this system with any garage dooropener that does not have the stop and reversefeature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the transmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programmingthe transmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote controltransmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, forfuture programming. You only need the originalremote control transmitter for Fixed Codeprogramming. It is also recommended that uponthe sale or lease termination of the vehicle,the programmed buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. See “Erasing Universal HomeRemote Buttons” later in this section.

When programming a garage door, it is advised topark outside of the garage. Be sure that peopleand objects are clear of the garage door orsecurity device you are programming.

145

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeMost garage door openers sold after 1996 areRolling Code units.

Programming a garage door opener involvestime-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedurebefore you begin. If you do not follow theseactions, the device will time out and you will haveto repeat the procedure.

To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outsidebuttons at the same time for one totwo seconds, and immediately release them.

146

2. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. It can usually be foundwhere the hanging antenna wire is attached tothe motor-head unit and may be a coloredbutton. Press this button. After you press thisbutton, you will have 30 seconds to completethe following steps.

3. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press andhold the universal home remote button thatyou would like to use to control the garagedoor until the garage door moves. Theindicator light, above the selected button,should slowly blink. You may need to hold thebutton from five to 20 seconds.

4. Immediately, within one second, releasethe button when the garage door moves.The indicator light will blink rapidly untilprogramming is complete.

5. Press and release the same button again.The garage door should move, confirmingthat programming is successful and complete.

To program another Rolling Code device such asan additional garage door opener, a securitydevice, or home automation device, repeatSteps 1 through 5, choosing a different functionbutton in Step 3 than what you used for the garagedoor opener.

If these instructions do not work, you probablyhave a Fixed Code garage door opener. Follow theProgramming instructions that follow for a FixedCode garage door opener.

147

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeMost garage door openers sold before 1996 areFixed Code units.

Programming a garage door opener involvestime-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedurebefore you begin. If you do not follow theseactions, the device will time out and you will haveto repeat the procedure.

To program up to three devices:

1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garagedoor opener, remove the battery cover onyour hand held transmitter supplied bythe manufacturer of your garage door openermotor. If you see a row of dip switchessimilar to the graphic above, you have a FixedCode garage door opener. If you do not seea row of dip switches, return to the previoussection for Programming Universal HomeRemote – Rolling Code.

148

Your panel of switches may not appearexactly as they do in the examples above,but they should be similar.The switch positions on your hand-heldtransmitter may be labeled, as follows:

• A switch in the up position may be labeledas “Up,” “+,” or “On.”

• A switch in the down position may belabeled as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”

• A switch in the middle position may belabeled as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”

Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions

149

2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settingsfrom left to right as follows:

• When a switch is in the up position,write “Left.”

• When a switch is in the down position,write “Right.”

• If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “Middle.”The switch settings that you wrote downin Step 2 will now become the buttonstrokes you enter into the Universal HomeRemote in Step 4. Be sure to enter theswitch settings that you wrote down inStep 2, in order from left to right, intothe Universal Home Remote, whencompleting Step 4.

3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press allthree buttons at the same time for aboutthree seconds. Release the buttons toput the Universal Home Remote intoprogramming mode.

4. The indicator lights will blink slowly.Enter each switch setting from Step 2 intoyour vehicle’s Universal Home Remote.

150

You will have two and one-half minutes tocomplete Step 4. Now press one button on theUniversal Home Remote for each switchsetting as follows:

• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button inthe vehicle.

• If you wrote “Right,” press the right buttonin the vehicle.

• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middlebutton in the vehicle.

5. After entering all of the switch positions,again, firmly press and release all threebuttons at the same time. The indicator lightswill turn on.

6. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light abovethe selected button should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

8. Press and release the same button again.The garage door should move, confirmingthat programming is successful and complete.

To program another Fixed Code device such as anadditional garage door opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8,choosing a different button in Step 6 than what youused for the garage door opener.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttons byrepeating the instructions.

151

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttons whenyou sell or terminate your lease.

To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code onthe Universal Home Remote device:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at thesame time for approximately 20 seconds, untilthe indicator lights, located directly abovethe buttons, begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,release both buttons. The codes from allbuttons will be erased.


Storage AreasGlove BoxOpen the glove box by lifting up on the lever.Close the glove box with a firm push.

Cupholder(s)

There are two removable cupholders and additionalstorage areas located at the rear of the shift lever.To access, push the button and the cover will slideback automatically. To close, slide the coverforward and lock into place.

152

Pull down the door on the back of the centerconsole to use the rear seat cupholders.

Center Console Storage AreaYour vehicle has a center console with two storageareas. To access the upper tray storage, lift thepassenger side lever. To access the lower storagearea, lift the driver side lever.

Convenience NetYour vehicle may have a convenience net locatedon each side of the trunk to help keep smallloads, like grocery bags, in place during sharpturns or quick stops and starts.

The net is not designed for larger, heavier items.

153

SunroofIf your vehicle has asunroof, the switch islocated on the headlinerbetween the map lamps.

The sunroof will only operate while the ignition isin ON or in ACC, or if Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 118.

Press the back of the switch and release it toopen the sunroof to the vent position. From thevent position, press and release the back ofthe switch to express-open the sunroof.

To stop the sunroof from express opening, pressthe switch again. If the sunshade is closed, itwill open automatically when the sunroof openspast the vented position.

A deflector will automatically raise when thesunroof is opened. The deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

To close the sunroof, press the front of the switchand hold it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroofwill stop if the switch is released. Close thesunshade by hand.

The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened orclosed if the vehicle has an electrical failure.

Notice: If you force the sunshade forward ofthe sliding glass panel, damage will occurand the sunroof may not open or closeproperly. Always close the glass panel beforeclosing the sunshade.

154

Sunroof - PanoramicIf the vehicle has a panoramic sunroof, it hasfour glass panels that tilt or stack upon each other,when the sunroof control is turned to the vent orone of three opened positions. There is a separatecontrol for the automatic sunshade.

The sunroof will only operate while the ignition isON or in ACC, or if Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 118.

The panoramic sunroof control is located on theheadliner. From the closed position, turn thecontrol clockwise to vent the sunroof or open it tothree different positions.

0 (Closed Position): Turn the control to thisposition to close the panoramic sunroof.

1 (Vent Position): Turn the control to thisposition to vent the panoramic sunroof. The frontglass panel of the sunroof will tilt forward andthe sunshade will automatically retract to the ventposition.

155

2 (First-Open Position): Turn the control to thisposition to open the panoramic sunroof abouta third of the way. The second glass panelwill retract and the fourth glass panel will stackabove the roof. The sunshade will automaticallyretract to this position.

3 (Second-Open Position): Turn the control tothis position to open the panoramic sunroof abouthalf-way. The second glass panel will retractand the third panel will stack in front of the fourthglass panel. The sunshade will automaticallyretract to this position.

4 (Full-Open Position): Turn the control to thisposition to completely open the panoramic sunroof.The second glass panel retracts and stacks infront of the third and fourth panels. The sunshadewill automatically retract to the full-open position.To lessen wind noise in this position, use theautomatic sunshade control and close thesunshade to the comfort stop position.See “Sunshade” following.

Anti-Pinch FeatureIf an object is in the path of the sunroof when it isclosing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the objectand stop the sunroof from closing at the point ofobstruction. The sunroof will then reverse direction.

SunshadeThe automatic sunshadecontrol is located on theheadliner, betweenthe map lamp controls.

The sunshade can be independently opened orclosed while the panoramic sunroof is closed.To express-open or express-close the sunshade,press and release the control rearward orforward. The sunshade will retract to the full-openor closed position. To stop the movement ofthe sunshade, press the control a second time.To close the sunshade to a particular position,continue to press the control and release it whenthe desired position is reached.

Neither the panoramic sunroof nor the sunshadecan be opened or closed if the vehicle has anelectrical failure.

156

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 160Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 162Other Warning Devices ............................. 162Horn .......................................................... 162Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel ............ 162Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 163Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 164Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 164Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 164Windshield Wipers ..................................... 165Windshield Washer .................................... 166Cruise Control ........................................... 167Headlamps ................................................ 170Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 170Headlamps Off in PARK (P) ...................... 171Delayed Headlamps .................................. 171Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 171Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 172Fog Lamps ................................................ 173Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 173Dome Lamp .............................................. 174Entry/Exit Lighting ...................................... 174

Parade Dimming ........................................ 175Overhead Console Reading Lamps ........... 175Trunk Lamp ............................................... 175Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 175Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 176

Climate Controls ......................................... 177Climate Control System ............................. 177Automatic Climate Control System ............. 181Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 186

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 187Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 188Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 189Trip Odometer ........................................... 189Tachometer ............................................... 189Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 189Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 190Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 190Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 191Charging System Light .............................. 193Brake System Warning Light ..................... 194Antilock Brake System Warning Light ........ 195Low Tire Pressure Warning Light .............. 196

Section 3 Instrument Panel

157

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light ........................................ 196

Enhanced Traction SystemWarning Light ........................................ 197

Electronic Stability ControlIndicator Light ........................................ 197

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light ........................................ 198

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 198Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 199Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 202Security Light ............................................ 202Cruise Control Light .................................. 203Highbeam On Light ................................... 203Fuel Gage ................................................. 203

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 204DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 205DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 206DIC Vehicle Personalization ....................... 211

Audio System(s) ......................................... 217Setting the Time ........................................ 218Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 220Using an MP3 ........................................... 229XM Radio Messages ................................. 236Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................. 238Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 241Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 241Radio Reception ........................................ 242Care of Your CDs ..................................... 243Care of the CD Player .............................. 243Backglass Antenna .................................... 243XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 244

Section 3 Instrument Panel

158

✍ NOTES

159

Instrument Panel Overview

160

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 186.

B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 163.

C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument PanelCluster on page 188.

D. Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever. SeeWindshield Wipers on page 165 and WindshieldWasher on page 166.

E. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 162.

F. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 191.

G. Adjustable Pedal Buttons (If Equipped). SeeAdjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal onpage 120.

H. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. SeeInstrument Panel Brightness on page 173.

I. Fog Lamps Button (If Equipped). SeeFog Lamps on page 173.

J. Cruise Controls. See Cruise Control onpage 167.

K. Tilt Lever. See Tilt and Telescopic SteeringWheel on page 162.

L. Horn. See Horn on page 162.M. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).

See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 241.

N. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions onpage 117.

O. Climate Control System or Automatic ClimateControl System. See Climate Control Systemon page 177 or Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 181.

P. Traction Control Button. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 253.

Q. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transaxle Operationon page 122.

R. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 217.

S. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 152.

161

Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flashers let you warn thepolice and others that you have a problem. Thefront and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedtowards the center ofthe instrument panel.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

While the hazard warning flashers are on, the turnsignals do not work.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition the key is in, and even if the key is notin the ignition switch.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on the steeringwheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt and Telescopic Steering WheelA tilt and telescope wheel lets you adjust thesteering wheel before you drive. The steering wheelcan be raised to the highest level to give your legsmore room when you enter and exit the vehicle.

The lever that lets you tilt and telescope thesteering wheel is located on the left side of thesteering column.

162

To tilt and telescope the steering wheel, pull downthe lever. Then move the steering wheel up ordown or backward or forward into a comfortableposition. Pull the lever up to lock the steeringwheel in place.

Do not adjust the tilt and telescope leverwhile driving.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 164.

• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 164.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 164.

• O Exterior Lamp Control. See Headlamps onpage 170.

163

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionslet you signal a turn or a lane change.To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the leverreturns automatically to the normal position.

An arrow on theinstrument panelcluster flashes in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever returnsby itself when it is released.If the arrows flash rapidly or do not go on at all asyou signal a turn or lane change, a signal bulbcould be burned out and other drivers will not seeyour turn signal.Replace burned out bulbs to help avoid anaccident. Also, check the appropriate fuses. SeeFuses on page 392.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam tohigh beam, push the turn signal/multifunction levertoward the front of the vehicle.

This light on theinstrument panelcluster comes on ifthe high beam lampsare turned on whilethe ignition is on.

To change the headlamps from high beam to lowbeam, pull the turn signal lever toward the rearof the vehicle.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beamheadlamps to signal a driver in front of you thatyou want to pass.

To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction levertoward you until the high-beam headlampscome on, then release the lever to turn them off.

164

Windshield Wipers

Use this lever, located on the right side of thesteering wheel, to operate the windshield wipers.

9 (Off): Move the lever to this position toturn off the windshield wipers.

& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers): Movethe lever to this position for intermittent or speedsensitive operation. The amount of delay timevaries between wiping cycles due to the delaysetting selected or the speed of the vehicle.

x (Delay): While the lever is in the intermittentposition, turn the intermittent adjust band withthis symbol on it up or down to select a shorter orlonger delay between wiping cycles. To the leftof the adjust band are bars, increasing in size frombottom to top, that indicate the frequency of thewipes. Smaller bars mean the wipers movement isless frequent. Larger bars mean the movementis more frequent.

6 (Low Speed): Move the lever up to thefirst setting past intermittent, for steady wiping atlow speed.

1 (High Speed): Move the lever up to thesecond setting past intermittent, for wipingat a high speed.

8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down tothis position for a single wiping cycle. Hold it thereuntil the windshield wipers start; then let go.The windshield wipers stop after one wiping cycle.If additional wiping cycles are needed, hold thelever down longer.

165

Damaged wiper blades can prevent you fromseeing well enough to drive safely. Clear ice andsnow from the wiper blades before using themto prevent damage.

If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them. If your bladesdo become damaged, get new blades.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.A circuit breaker stops the motor until it cools.Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload. Ifthe motor gets stuck, turn the wipers off, clearaway the snow or ice, and then turn the wipersback on.

As an added safety feature, if the wipers are onfor more than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlampsturn on automatically. They turn off 15 secondsafter the wipers are turned off.

Windshield WasherTo wash the windshield, press the button at theend of the lever until the washers begin.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

When the button is released, the washers stop,but the wipers continue to wipe about three timesor resume the previous speed.

166

Cruise ControlCruise control lets you maintain a speed of about25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. This can really helpon long trips. Cruise control does not work atspeeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

The cruise controlbuttons are located onthe steering wheel.

I (On/Off): Press I to turn the cruise controlsystem on and off.

167

RES+ (Resume): Press RES+ to resume a setspeed and to accelerate the speed.

SET− (Set): Press SET– to set a speed and todecrease the speed.

[ CANCEL: Press [ to cancel cruise control.To set a speed do the following:

1. Press I to turn cruise control on. Theindicator light on the button comes on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.3. Press the SET− and release it. The cruise

symbol displays in the instrument panelcluster to show the system is engaged.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.When the brakes are applied, the cruise controlshuts off.If the vehicle is in cruise control and the TractionControl System (TCS) or Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) begins to limit wheel spin, the cruisecontrol automatically disengages. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 253 and EnhancedTraction System (ETS) on page 255. Whenroad conditions allow, the cruise control can beused again.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set the cruise control at a desiredspeed and then apply the brakes. This disengagesthe cruise control. The cruise symbol in theinstrument panel cluster also goes out indicatingcruise is no longer engaged. To return to thepreviously set speed, you do not need togo through the set process again. Once thevehicle is at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, you can briefly press the RES+.

This takes the vehicle back up to the previouslychosen speed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed.

• If the cruise control system is alreadyengaged, press the RES+. Hold it there untilyou reach the desired speed, and then releasethe button.

• To increase the vehicle’s speed in very smallamounts, briefly press the RES+ and thenrelease it. Each time this is done, the vehiclegoes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

168

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise ControlIf the cruise control system is already engaged:

• Push and hold the SET− until the desiredlower speed is reached, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, brieflypush the SET−. Each time this is done, thevehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’sspeed. When you take your foot off the pedal,the vehicle slows down to the previous cruisecontrol speed that was set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control works on hillsdepends upon the vehicle’s speed, load, and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steephills, you might have to step on the acceleratorpedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake or shift to alower gear to keep the vehicle at a lower speed.

Of course, applying the brakes ends cruisecontrol. Many drivers find this to be too muchtrouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are three ways to disengage the cruisecontrol:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal; when cruisecontrol disengages, the cruise symbol in theinstrument panel cluster goes out.

• Press the on/off button, to turn off the cruisecontrol system.

• Press the cancel button.

When cruise control disengages, the cruisesymbol in the instrument panel clustergoes out.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or theignition, the cruise control set speed memoryis erased.

169

Headlamps

The band on the lever on the outboard side of thesteering column operates the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp control has the followingfour positions:

2 (Headlamps): Turn the band to thisposition to turn on the headlamps, parkinglamps, and taillamps.

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the band to this positionto turn on the parking lamps and taillamps only.

AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Turn theband to this position to automatically turn onthe Daytime Running Lamps during daytime, andthe headlamps, parking lamps, and taillampsat night.

P (Off/On): Turn the band to this position to turnon the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada,this position only works when a vehicle is inthe PARK (P) position.

To turn on the Automatic Headlamp System, turnthe switch to off/on. To turn them off, turn theswitch to off/on again. This is a momentary controlswitch that springs back when released. TheAutomatic Headlamp System always turns on atthe beginning of an ignition cycle.

Headlamps on ReminderIf you open the driver’s door and turn off theignition while leaving the lamps on, you will hear awarning chime.

170

Headlamps Off in PARK (P)This feature works when the ignition is ON and itis dark outside. To turn the headlamps offwhen it is dark outside but keep other exteriorlights on, turn the exterior lamp control tothe parking lamp position. In this position, theparking lamps, sidemarker lamps, taillamps,license plate lamps and instrument panel lightsare on, but the headlamps are off.

To turn on the headlamps along with the otherlamps when it is dark outside, turn the exteriorlamp control to the AUTO or headlamp position.

This feature will not work for Canadian vehicles.

Delayed HeadlampsThe delayed headlamps feature keeps theheadlamps on for 20 seconds after the key isturned to OFF, then the headlamps automaticallyturn off.

To override the 20 second delayed headlampfeature while it is active turn the turn signal/multifunction lever up one position and thenback to AUTO.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle during theday. DRL are helpful in many different drivingconditions, but they can be especially helpful in theshort periods after dawn and before sunset. Fullyfunctional DRL are required on all vehicles first soldin Canada. The vehicle has a light sensor on top ofthe instrument panel that controls the DRL. Makesure it is not covered, or the head lamps will be onwhen they are not needed.

The DRL system makes the low-beam headlampscome on at a reduced brightness when thefollowing conditions are met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.

• The exterior lamps control is in the parkinglamps only position (This applies only tovehicles that are first sold in Canada).

• The light sensor detects daytime light.

• The parking brake is released or the vehicle isnot in PARK.

171

When the DRL system is on, the taillamps,sidemarker lamps, parking lamps, and instrumentpanel lights are not on unless you turn theexterior lamps control to the parking lamp position.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when they are needed.

Automatic Headlamp SystemWhen it is dark enough outside, the automaticheadlamp system turns on the headlamps at thenormal brightness along with other lamps suchas the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps, andthe instrument panel lights. The radio lightswill also be dim.

Your vehicle has a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel that controls the automaticheadlamp system. Make sure it is not covered orthe automatic headlamp system will be onwhen it is not needed.

There is a delay in the transition between thedaytime and nighttime operation of the DRL andthe automatic headlamp systems so that

driving under bridges or bright overhead streetlights does not affect the system. The DRLand automatic headlamp systems will only beaffected when the light sensor sees a change inlighting lasting longer than this delay.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, theautomatic headlamp system comes onimmediately. Once you leave the garage, it takesabout one minute for the automatic headlampsystem to change to DRL if it is light outside. Duringthat delay, the instrument panel cluster may not beas bright as usual. Make sure the instrument panelbrightness control is in the full bright position. See“Instrument Panel Brightness Control” underInstrument Panel Brightness on page 173.

To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlampsystem off, turn the ignition on and set theexterior light switch to the off/on position. ForCanadian vehicles, the transaxle must stayin PARK (P) for this function.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamps when they are needed.

172

Fog Lamps

If your vehicle has foglamps, the fog lampbutton is located onthe instrument panel,to the left of thesteering wheel.

The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to work.

Push the button to turn the fog lamps on. Anindicator light in the button will glow when the foglamps are on. Push the button again to turnthe fog lamps off.

The parking lamps automatically turn on and offwhen the fog lamps are turned on and off.

The fog lamps turn off while the high-beamheadlamps are turned on.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Instrument Panel Brightness

The control for thisfeature is located onthe instrument panelto the left of thesteering wheel.

Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise tobrighten or dim the lights.

173

Dome LampYour vehicle might have a dome lamp without aswitch. If the dome lamp has a switch, thefollowing are the settings.

9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turnthe lamp off, even when a door is open.

1 (Door): Move the lever to this position so thatthe lamp comes on when a door is opened.

+ (On): Move the lever to this position to turnthe dome lamp on.

Entry/Exit LightingThe lamps inside the vehicle come on when anydoor is opened. These lamps fade out about20 seconds after all of the doors have been closedor when the ignition is turned to ON. They alsogo on when you press the unlock symbol button orthe horn symbol on the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) system transmitter.

The lamps inside the vehicle stay on for about20 seconds after the key is removed fromthe ignition to provide light as you exit.

174

Parade DimmingParade dimming is a separate lighting mode thatcomes on while the parking lamps are turnedon during the day. It prevents the display lights andindicator lights from being dim, while the parkinglamps are used during the day.

Overhead Console Reading LampsThe vehicle may have reading lamps on theoverhead console. These lamps come on when thedoors are opened if the lamp switch is not in theOFF position. Press the side of each lamp to turnthem on and off, while the doors are closed.

Overhead Ambient LightingThese lamps will automatically turn on and off ascontrolled by the light sensor located on top ofthe instrument panel.

Trunk LampThe trunk lamp comes on when the trunk is openand turns off when it is closed.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionYour vehicle has a battery run-down featuredesigned to protect the vehicle’s battery.

When any interior lamp (trunk, reading lamps, ordome lamp) is left on when the ignition isturned off, the battery run-down protection systemautomatically shuts the lamp off after 20 minutes.This prevents draining of the battery.

To reactivate the interior lamps, do one ofthe following:

• Open any door.

• Press any Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter button.

• Press the power door lock switch.

• Press the remote trunk release.

• Turn the lamp that was left on to off and thento on again.

175

Accessory Power Outlet(s)Accessory power outlets can be used to connectauxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellulartelephone or CB radio.

There are two accessory power outlets.One accessory power outlet is inside the centerstorage console and the other is located onthe center storage console below the climatecontrols.

To use an outlet, lift the protective cap. When notin use, always cover the outlet with the protectivecap. The accessory power outlet is operationalat all times.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment pluggedin for an extended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain the battery. Power isalways supplied to the outlets. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment that exceedsthe maximum 20 ampere rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem, see your retailerfor additional information on the accessorypower outlet.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle can damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer/retailer before addingelectrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

176

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling and ventilation for your vehicle. Ifyour vehicle has the remote start feature, theclimate control system functions as part ofthe remote start feature. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 96.

Operation

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. The fan must be on to run theair-conditioning compressor.

To change the air delivery settings, turn the rightknob to select one of the following:

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air tothe instrument panel outlets, and the remainingair to the floor outlets. Some air can be directedtoward the side windows.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed to theside window outlets and windshield.

: (Outside Air): Press the right side of thisbutton to turn the outside air mode on. Airfrom outside the vehicle will circulate throughoutthe vehicle. When the button is pressed, anindicator light comes on. The outside air mode canbe used with all modes, but it cannot be usedwith the recirculation mode. Pressing this buttonwill cancel the recirculation mode.

177

? (Recirculation): Press the left side of thebutton to turn the recirculation mode on. Theair inside the vehicle will be recirculated throughthe climate control system and the vehicle,not from outside your vehicle. This mode is helpfulwhen trying to limit odors from entering thevehicle and for maximum air conditioningperformance in hot weather. When the buttonis pressed, an indicator light above the buttoncomes on. The recirculation indicator light blinksthree times if you try to use recirculation in a modein which it cannot function. Only use this modewhen it is needed for comfort, since windowfogging rapidly occurs if the air conditioningcompressor is not engaged.

Pressing this button will cancel the outside airmode. When switching to the defog or defrostmodes the system automatically moves fromrecirculation to outside air. When the vehicle orfan is turned off and back on, the system defaultsto outside air automatically. Only use recirculationmode when it is needed for comfort, sincewindow fogging can occur.

Temperature Control: Turn the center knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the temperature inside your vehicle.

When it is cold outside 0°F (−18°C) or lower,use the engine coolant heater, if vehicle has one,to provide warmer air faster to the vehicle. Anengine coolant heater warms the coolant theengine uses that provides heat to warm the insideof your vehicle. For more information, seeEngine Coolant Heater on page 120.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning system on or off. Whenthe air conditioning button is pressed, an indicatorlight will come on to show it is activated.

The air-conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so a small amount of water drippingunderneath the vehicle while it is idling or afterthe engine is turned off is normal.

178

Maximum Air ConditioningOn hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them. This helps reduce thetime it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It alsohelps the air conditioning system operatemore efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:

1. Select the C vent mode.

2. Select the highest fan speed.

3. Select # air conditioning.

4. Select the ? recirculation mode.

5. Select the coolest temperature.

Using these settings together for long periods oftime can cause the air inside of the vehicle tobecome too dry. To prevent this from happening,after the air in the vehicle has cooled, turn therecirculation mode off.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climate

control system is used properly. There aretwo modes to choose from to clear fog or frostfrom your windshield. Use the defog mode to clearthe windows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fogor frost from the windshield more quickly.

Turn the right knob to select the defog ordefrost mode.

- (Defog): This mode splits the air between thewindshield and the floor outlets with a small amountdirected to the side windows. When this mode isselected, the system automatically turns offrecirculation. The air-conditioning compressor willrun unless the outside temperature is at or belowfreezing. The air-conditioning compressor operatesalthough the indicator light is not on. Theair-conditioning indicator light turns off when defogis selected. If the air-conditioning button is pressedwhile in defog mode, the indicator light will turn on.If the button is pressed again, the light will turn off.The recirculation mode cannot be selected while inthe defog mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

179

1 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air tothe windshield with some air directed to thefloor vents. In this mode, the system automaticallyforces outside air into the vehicle. Theair-conditioning compressor does not run unlessthe outside temperature is at or below freezing.The air-conditioning compressor operates althoughthe indicator light is not on. The air-conditioningindicator light turns off when defrost is selected. Ifthe air-conditioning button is pressed while indefrost mode, the indicator light turns on. If thebutton is pressed again, the light turns off.Recirculation cannot be selected while in thedefrost mode.

To help clear the windshield quickly, dothe following:

1. Select the defrost mode.

2. Select the highest temperature.

3. Select the highest fan speed.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window.

< REAR: Press this button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. An indicator lightcomes on to show that the rear window defoggeris activated. Be sure to clear as much snowfrom the rear window as possible.

If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear windowdefogger turns off about 15 minutes after thebutton is pressed. If turned on again, the defoggeronly runs for about seven minutes before turningoff. The defogger can also be turned off bypressing the button again or by turning off theengine.

If your vehicle’s speed is maintained above50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window defoggerremains on once the button is pressed.

If your vehicle has heated outside mirrors, thesurface of the outside mirrors heat when the rearwindow defogger is activated. See OutsidePower Mirrors on page 135.

180

If your vehicle has the remote start feature, therear defogger automatically turned on if it iscold outside. When the vehicle transitions out ofthe remote start mode, the rear defogger turns off.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 96.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,tape, a decal or anything similar to thedefogger grid.

Remote Start Climate Control OperationIf your vehicle has the remote start feature and it isactivated, the climate control system heats andcools the inside of the vehicle using the modesthat were set before the vehicle was turnedoff. The climate control knobs will remain activeduring a remote start. However, the climate controlbuttons will be inactive until the ignition is turnedon by the key. If the fan knob is left in the OFFposition, the climate control system will not operateduring remote start.

Automatic Climate Control SystemIf your vehicle has this system, you canautomatically control the heating, cooling, andventilation in your vehicle. If your vehicle has theremote start feature, the automatic climatecontrol system functions as part of the remotestart feature. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 96.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): Select AUTO on both the fanspeed control and the air delivery mode controlknobs to activate the automatic system. Whenautomatic operation is active the system willcontrol the inside temperature and air delivery.

181

Use the steps below to place the entire system inautomatic mode:

1. Turn the fan knob and the mode knob to theAUTO position.The current set temperature displays. WhenAUTO is selected, the air conditioningoperation and air inlet is automaticallycontrolled. The air conditioning compressorruns while the outside temperature isover about 40°F (4°C). The air inlet willnormally be set to outside air. If it is hotoutside, the air inlet may automatically switchto recirculate inside air to help quickly cooldown your vehicle.

2. Set the temperature.An initial setting of 73°F (23°C) isrecommended. Allow about 20 minutes for thesystem to regulate. Press the up or down arrowtemperature buttons to adjust the temperaturesetting as necessary. If the temperature is setat 60°F (15°C) the system remains at themaximum cooling setting. If the temperature isset at 90°F (32°C) the system remains at themaximum heat setting. Choosing eithermaximum setting does not cause the vehicle toheat or cool any faster.

Be careful not to cover the sensor located onthe top of the instrument panel near thewindshield. This sensor regulates airtemperature based on the intensity of the sun.Also do not cover the sensor grille on the lowerright side of the climate control faceplate, asthis regulates the inside temperature.To avoid blowing cold air at engine start-up incold weather, the system delays turning on thefan until warm air is available. The length ofdelay depends on the engine coolanttemperature. Turning the fan knob overridesthis delay and changes the fan to theselected speed.

Manual OperationYou can also manually adjust the air deliverymode or fan speed.

9 (Off): Select this position on the fan knob toturn off the entire climate control system.Outside air still enters the vehicle, and is directedto the floor. The direction can be changed bychanging the mode position. The temperature canalso be adjusted using either the up or downarrow temperature buttons.

9 (Fan): Turn the knob with the fan symbol tomanually adjust the fan speed.

182

H (Vent): Use this mode to direct air to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Use this mode to direct half of theair to the instrument panel outlets, and theremaining air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Use this mode to direct most of theair to the floor outlets with some air directed to theside window outlets.

The right knob can also be used to select defog ordefrost modes. Information on defogging anddefrosting can be found later in this section.

: (Outside Air): Press the right side of thisbutton to turn the outside air mode on. Airfrom outside the vehicle will circulate throughoutthe vehicle. When the button is pressed, anindicator light comes on. The outside air mode canbe used with all modes, but it cannot be usedwith the recirculation mode. Pressing this buttonwill cancel the recirculation mode.

? (Recirculation): Press the left side of thebutton to turn the recirculation mode on. Theair inside the vehicle recirculates throughthe climate control system and the vehicle, not

from outside your vehicle. This mode is helpfulwhen trying to limit odors from entering the vehicleand for maximum air conditioning performancein hot weather. When the button is pressed,an indicator light above the button comes on. Therecirculation indicator light blinks three times ifyou try to use recirculation in a mode in which itcannot function. Only use this mode when itis needed for comfort, since window foggingrapidly occurs if the air conditioning compressor isnot engaged.

Pressing this button cancels the auto recirculationfeature. Each time the vehicle is started, thesystem reverts to the auto recirculation function.

If you select recirculation while in defrost, defog orfloor, the light on the button flashes three timesand then goes out to indicate that this is notallowed. This is to prevent window fogging.

When the weather is cool or damp, operating thesystem in recirculation for extended periods oftime can cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows.To clear the fog, select either defog or defrost.Make sure the air conditioning is on. Allow the airconditioning to run automatically to helpdehumidify the air.

183

Temperature Control: Press the up and downarrows to increase or decrease the temperatureinside the vehicle.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning compressor on and off. Alight above the button comes on while theair conditioning is on.When air conditioning is selected or is in AUTOmode, the system runs the air conditioningautomatically to cool and dehumidify the airentering the vehicle.On hot days, open the windows long enough to lethot inside air escape. This reduces the time ittakes for your vehicle to cool down. Thenkeep your windows closed for the air conditionerto work its best.On cool, but sunny days while using manualoperation of the automatic system, use bi-level todeliver warm air to the floor and cooler air tothe instrument panel outlets. To warm or cool theair delivered, press the temperature buttons tothe desired setting.In AUTO mode the system cools and dehumidifiesthe air inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTOmode, the system maximizes its performance byusing recirculation as necessary.

Heating: On cold days when using manualoperation of the automatic system, use floor modeto deliver air to the floor outlets. To warm orcool the air delivered, push the temperaturebuttons to the desired setting.

To use the automatic mode, turn the knob toAUTO and adjust the temperature by pressing thetemperature buttons.

The heater works best if the windows arekept closed.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. There aretwo modes to choose from to clear fog or frostfrom your windshield. Use the defog mode to clearthe windows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fogor frost from the windshield more quickly.

- (Defog): Turn the mode knob to this positionto select the defog setting. which will deliverair to the floor and windshield outlets. Use thissetting to clear the windows of fog or moisture.

184

0 (Defrost): Turn the mode knob to this positionto defrost the windshield. The system automaticallycontrols the fan speed if defrost is selected fromthe AUTO mode. If the outside temperature is 40°F(4°C) or warmer, the air conditioning compressorautomatically runs to help dehumidify the airand dry the windshield. The air conditioningindicator light blinks three times if the compressoris turned off while in this mode.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. An indicator light abovethe button comes on to show that the rearwindow defogger is activated.

If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear windowdefogger turns off about 15 minutes after thebutton is pressed. If additional warming time isneeded, press the button again.

If the vehicle’s speed is maintained above 50 mph(80 km/h), the rear window defogger remainson once the button is pressed.

If your vehicle has heated outside mirrors, thesurface of the outside mirrors will also heat whenthe rear window defogger is activated. SeeOutside Power Mirrors on page 135.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature, therear defogger automatically turns on if it iscold outside. The indicator light will not be on.When the vehicle transitions out of remotestart mode the rear defogger turns off.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actions may damagethe rear defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

185

Remote Start Climate Control OperationIf your vehicle has remote start and it is activated,the climate control system heats and cools theinside of the vehicle using the previous systemsettings before the vehicle was turned off.The climate control knobs will remain active duringa remote start. However, the climate controlbuttons will be inactive until the ignition is turnedon by the key. If the fan knob is left in the OFFposition, the climate control system will not operateduring remote start.

With the automatic climate control system, theclimate control displays “RS” in place of thetemperature to indicate that remote start isactivated. For best performance, turn both the fanand mode knobs to AUTO. If the temperatureis cold enough and the mode knob is set to AUTO,the system begins in defrost to clear the windows.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the lever located in the center of each outletby moving it either side-to-side or up anddown, to change the direction and amount ofairflow in the vehicle.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Do not use non-GM approved hood deflectorsas they could adversely affect the performanceof the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside ofyour vehicle more effectively.

• When an objectionable odor outside thevehicle is encountered, use the recirculationmode, with the temperature knob at acomfortable setting to prevent the odor fromentering the vehicle through the ventilationsystem. This can be helpful when drivingthrough a long tunnel with poor ventilation.However, extended usage of this mode in coldor cool weather can cause window fogging.

186

Warning Lights, Gages,and IndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages onyour vehicle. The pictures help to locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that somethingis wrong before it becomes serious enough tocause an expensive repair or replacement. Payingattention to the warning lights and gages could alsosave you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Asthe details show on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you start theengine just to let you know they are working. Ifyou are familiar with this section, you shouldnot be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to let youknow when there is a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on as you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting todo repairs can be costly and even dangerous.So please get to know your vehicle’s warning lightsand gages. They can be a big help.

187

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. Youwill know how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will needto drive safely and economically. Your vehicle has this instrument panel cluster, which includes indicatorwarning lights and gages that are explained on the following pages.

United States version shown, Canada Similar

188

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed inmiles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 211for more information.Your odometer shows how far your vehicle hasbeen driven, in either miles (used in the UnitedStates) or kilometers (used in Canada).Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer.The digital odometer will read 999,999 if someonetries to turn it back.You may wonder what happens if your vehicleneeds a new odometer installed. If the newone can be set to the mileage total of the oldodometer, then it must be. But if it can’t, then it isset at zero and a label must be put on thedriver’s door to show the old mileage readingwhen the new odometer was installed.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can tell you how far you havedriven since you last reset it.The trip odometer is accessed and reset throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC). See DICOperation and Displays on page 205 for moreinformation.

TachometerYour tachometer displays the engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to ON or START, a chimewill come on for several seconds to remindpeople to fasten their safety belts, unless thedriver’s safety belt is already buckled.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stayon for severalseconds, then it willflash for several more.

This chime and light is repeated if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

189

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to ON orSTART, a chime will sound for several seconds toremind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passenger airbagis enabled. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 80 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and light arerepeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel cluster, which shows the airbagsymbol. The system checks the airbag’selectrical system for malfunctions. The light tellsyou if there is an electrical problem. Thesystem check includes the airbag sensor, thepretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring andthe crash sensing and diagnostic module. Formore information on the airbag system, see AirbagSystem on page 69.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

190

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to ON.If the light does not come on then, have it fixed soit will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your instrument panel has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to ON or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag.


191

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag are enabled(may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impact airbag. Achild in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off. Werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.

192

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 80 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your retailer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of the airbags. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 190.

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on brieflywhen you turn on theignition, but theengine is not running,as a check to show youit is working.

It should go out once the engine is running. If itstays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the charging system.It could indicate that you have problems with agenerator drive belt, or another electrical problem.Have it checked right away. Driving while thislight is on could drain your battery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

193

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set yourparking brake. The light will stay on if your parkingbrake does not release fully. If it stays on afteryour parking brake is fully released, it means youhave a brake problem.

The Driver Information Center (DIC) may display aBRAKE FLUID message. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 206 for more information.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pulloff the road and stop carefully. You may notice thatthe pedal is harder to push or the pedal may gocloser to the floor. It may take longer to stop.Try turning off and restarting the vehicle one ortwo times, if the light is still on, have the vehicletowed for service. See Towing Your Vehicleon page 284.United States Canada

194

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Antilock Brake SystemWarning LightYour vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS).

This light will come onwhen your engine isstarted and may stay onfor several seconds.This is normal.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to off. If thelight comes on and the chime sounds whenyou are driving, pull your vehicle over to a safelocation and stop as soon as possible. Turnthe ignition off. Then start the engine again to resetthe system. If the light still stays on, or comeson again while you are driving, your vehicle needsservice. If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, you still have brakes, but you donot have antilock brakes. If the regular brakesystem warning light is also on, you do not haveantilock brakes and there is a problem withyour regular brakes. See Brake System WarningLight on page 194 earlier in this section.

The ABS warning light will come on briefly whenyou turn the ignition key to ON. This is normal.If the light does not come on then, have it fixed soit will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

195

Low Tire Pressure Warning LightThis light will come onbriefly when you turnthe ignition to RUN.

This light will also come on when one or more ofyour tires are significantly underinflated.A CHECK TIRE PRESS DIC message willaccompany the light, see DIC Warnings andMessages on page 206 for more information.Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe todo so. If underinflated, inflate to the properpressure. See Tires on page 348 for moreinformation.This light will flash for 60 seconds and then turnon solid if a problem is detected with the TirePressure Monitor system. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 357 for more information.

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

If your vehicle has theTraction Control System(TCS), this light maycome on for thefollowing reasons:

• If you turn the system off by pressing the TC(traction control) button located on the centerconsole, the light will come on and stay on. Toturn the system back on, press the button againand the warning light should go out.

• If there is a brake system problem that isspecifically related to traction control, the TCSwill turn off and the warning light will come on.

If the traction control system warning light comeson and stays on for an extended period oftime when the system is turned on, your vehicleneeds service.

196

Enhanced Traction SystemWarning Light

If your vehicle has theenhanced tractioncontrol system, this lightmay come on for thefollowing reasons:

• If you turn the system off by pressing theenhanced traction control button located on thecenter console, the light will come on andstay on. To turn the system back on, press thebutton again and the warning light shouldgo out.

• If there is a brake system problem that isspecifically related to enhanced tractioncontrol, the enhanced traction control will turnoff and the warning light will come on.

The TRACTION OFF message will also appear inthe Driver Information Center (DIC) with thislight. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 206 for more information.

If the enhanced traction control system warninglight comes on and stays on for an extendedperiod of time when the system is turned on, yourvehicle needs service.

Electronic Stability ControlIndicator Light

Your vehicle may havethe Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system.

You may feel or hear the system working, this isnormal. See Electronic Stability Control onpage 256 for more information.

When the ESC indicator light is on and either theSERVICE ESC or ESC OFF Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message is displayed, the system willnot assist the driver to maintain directionalcontrol of the vehicle. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 206 for more information.

197

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

This light indicates thatthe engine coolant hasoverheated or theradiator cooling fan isnot working.

This light will come on briefly when you turn onthe ignition as a check to show you it is working.

If the light comes on and the vehicle has beenoperating under normal driving conditions, pull offthe road, stop the vehicle, and turn off theengine as soon as possible.

See Cooling System on page 328 for moreinformation.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.If the gage pointer moves into the red area,the light comes on and you hear a chime, yourengine is too hot! It means that your enginecoolant has overheated.

If you have been operating your vehicle undernormal driving conditions and the gage reads hot,you should pull off the road, stop your vehicleand turn off the engine as soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 325.


198

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after a while, the emissioncontrols might not work as well, your vehicle’sfuel economy might not be as good, and theengine might not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs that might not becovered by your warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 297.

This light should come on, as a check toshow you it is working, when the ignition is onand the engine is not running. If the light doesnot come on, have it repaired.

199

This light will also come on during a malfunction inone of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service maybe required.

If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled as soon as it is possible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your retailer for service assoon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 302.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. Aloose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

200

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 299. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your retailer can check the vehicle. Yourretailer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know in orderto help your vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your retailercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

201

Oil Pressure Light

If your vehicle has lowengine oil pressure, thislight will stay on afteryou start your engine, orcome on and you willhear a chime when youare driving.

This indicates that your engine is not receivingenough oil. The engine could be low on oil,or could have some other oil problem. Have itfixed immediately.

This light will come on briefly when you turn onthe ignition as a check to show you it is working. Ifit does not come on with the ignition on, youmay have a problem with the bulb. Have it fixedright away.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

Security Light

For informationregarding this light, seeTheft-DeterrentSystems on page 112.

202

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set thecruise control.

The light goes out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 167 formore information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 164 for more information.

Fuel Gage

Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel youhave left, when the ignition is on. When theindicator nears empty, a LOW FUEL message willappear on the Driver Information Center (DIC).See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 206 formore information. You still have a little fuel left,but you should get more soon. The arrow onthe fuel gage points to side of the vehicle with thefuel door.


203

Here are four things that some owners ask about.These are normal and do not indicate a problemwith your fuel gage:

• At the service station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe gage indicated. For example, the gagemay have indicated the tank was half full, butit actually took a little more or less thanhalf the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The indicator moves a little when you turn acorner or speed up.

• The gage goes back to empty when you turnoff the ignition.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center(DIC). The DIC display gives you the status ofmany of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is alsoused to display driver personalization menu modesand warning/status messages. All messages willappear in the DIC display, located at the bottom ofthe instrument panel cluster.

The DIC buttons arelocated on the left sideof the steering wheel.

q (Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the vehicle information mode displays.

r (Reset): Press this button to reset somevehicle information mode displays, select apersonalization menu mode setting, oracknowledge a warning message.

Press and hold the information and reset buttonsat the same time for one second, then releasethe buttons to enter the personalization menu. SeeDIC Vehicle Personalization on page 211 formore information.

204

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC comes on when the ignition is on. TheDIC has different modes which can be accessedby pressing the DIC buttons. The button functionsare detailed in the following.

Information Modes

q (Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the following vehicle information modes:

Outside Air Temperature and OdometerPress the information button until the outsideair temperature and the odometer are displayed.This mode shows the temperature outside ofthe vehicle in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) ordegrees Celsius (°C) and the total distancethe vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km). The outside air temperaturewill appear on the left side of the DIC display andthe odometer will appear on the right side ofthe display.

To change the DIC display to English or metricunits, see “UNITS” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 211.

TRIP A or TRIP BPress the information button until TRIP A orTRIP B is displayed. These modes show thecurrent distance traveled since the last reset foreach trip odometer in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km). Both odometers can be used atthe same time.

Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separatelyby pressing and holding the reset button for afew seconds while the desired trip odometeris displayed.

FUEL RANGEPress the information button until FUEL RANGE isdisplayed. This mode shows the remainingdistance you can drive without refueling in eithermiles (mi) or kilometers (km). It is based onfuel economy and the fuel remaining in the tank.

When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOWwill display.

The fuel economy data used to determine fuelrange is an average of recent driving conditions.As your driving conditions change, this data isgradually updated. The FUEL RANGE modecannot be reset.

205

ECON (Economy)Press the information button until ECON isdisplayed. This mode shows how many miles pergallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)your vehicle is getting based on current and pastdriving conditions.

Press and hold the reset button while ECON isdisplayed to reset the average fuel economy.Average fuel economy will then be calculatedstarting from that point. If the average fueleconomy is not reset, it will be continually updatedeach time you drive.

AV (Average) SPEEDPress the information button until AV SPEED isdisplayed. This mode shows the vehicle’s averagespeed in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers perhour (km/h).

Press and hold the reset button while AV SPEEDis displayed to reset the average vehicle speed.

OIL LIFEPress the information button until OIL LIFE isdisplayed. The engine oil life system showsan estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life.

It will show 100% when the system is reset afteran oil change. It will alert you to change your oil ona schedule consistent with your driving conditions.

In addition to the engine oil life system monitoringthe oil life, additional maintenance is recommendedin the Maintenance Schedule in this manual.See Engine Oil on page 312 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 406.

Always reset the engine oil life system after an oilchange. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystem” under Engine Oil Life System onpage 315.

DIC Warnings and MessagesThese messages appear if there is a problemdetected in one of your vehicle’s systems.

A message clears when the vehicle’s condition isno longer present. To acknowledge a messageand clear it from the display, press and hold any ofthe DIC buttons. If the condition is still present,the warning message comes back on the next timethe vehicle is turned off and back on. With mostmessages, a warning chime sounds whenthe message displays. Your vehicle may haveother warning messages.

206

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFFThis message displays if the automatic headlampsystem is disabled with the headlamp switch.See Automatic Headlamp System on page 172for more information.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ONThis message displays if the automatic headlampsystem is enabled with the headlamp switch.See Automatic Headlamp System on page 172for more information.

BRAKE FLUIDThis message displays, while the ignition is on,when the brake fluid level is low. The brake systemwarning light on the instrument panel clusteralso comes on. See Brake System Warning Lighton page 194 for more information. Have thebrake system serviced by your retailer as soonas possible.

CHANGE OIL SOONThis message displays when the life of the engineoil has expired and it should be changed.

When this message is acknowledged and clearedfrom the display, the engine oil life systemmust still be reset separately. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 315 and Scheduled Maintenanceon page 406 for more information.

CHECK GAS CAPThis message displays if the fuel cap has notbeen fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to makesure that it is on properly. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turnthe message off.

CHECK TIRE PRESS (Pressure)This message displays when the tire pressure inone or more of the tires needs to be checked. If atire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop assoon as you can. Have the tire pressures checkedand set to those shown on the Tire LoadingInformation label. See Tires on page 348, LoadingYour Vehicle on page 279, and Inflation - TirePressure on page 356. If the tire pressure is low,the low tire pressure warning light comes on. SeeLow Tire Pressure Warning Light on page 196.

207

CRUISE ENGAGEDThis message displays when the cruise controlsystem is active. See Cruise Control on page 167for more information.

DOOR AJARThis message displays if one or more of thevehicle’s doors are not closed properly. Make surethat the door(s) are closed completely.

ENGINE DISABLEDThis message displays if the starting of the engineis disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by yourretailer immediately.

ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCEDThis message displays when the vehicle’s enginepower is reduced. Reduced engine power canaffect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If thismessage is on, but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced the next time thevehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at areduced speed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicle should be takento your retailer for service as soon as possible.

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVEIf your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control(ESC), this message displays when ESC isassisting you with directional control of the vehicle.You may feel or hear the system working andsee this message displayed in the DIC. Slipperyroad conditions may exist when this messageis displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.This message may stay on for a few seconds afterESC stops assisting you with directional controlof the vehicle. This is normal when the system isoperating. See Electronic Stability Control onpage 256 for more information.

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFFIf your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control(ESC), this message displays and the ESC lighton the instrument panel cluster comes onsolid when ESC is turned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Electronic Stability Controlon page 256 and Electronic Stability ControlIndicator Light on page 197 for more information.

ICE POSSIBLEThis message displays when the outside airtemperature is cold enough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.

208

KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOWThis message displays if the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace thebattery in the transmitter. See “BatteryReplacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 96.

LOW FUELThis message displays when your vehicle is lowon fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.See Fuel Gage on page 203, Fuel on page 299,and Filling the Tank on page 302 for moreinformation.

LOW OIL LEVELOn some vehicles, this message displays whenthe vehicle’s engine oil is low. Fill the oil tothe proper level as soon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 308 for theengine oil fill location. Also see Engine Oil onpage 312 for information on the kind of oil to useand the proper oil level.

LOW TRACTIONIf your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System(ETS) or the Traction Control System (TCS),this message displays when the system is activelylimiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditionsmay exist if this message is displayed, so adjustyour driving accordingly. This message stayson for a few seconds after the system stopslimiting wheel spin. See Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) on page 255 or Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 253 for more information.

LOW WASHER FLUIDThis message displays when the vehicle’swindshield washer fluid is low. Fill the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir to the proper level assoon as possible. See Windshield Washer Fluidon page 334.

PUSH PARK PEDALThis message displays if the parking brake is leftengaged. See Parking Brake on page 127 formore information.

209

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays when there is a problemwith the airbag system. Have your vehicle servicedby your retailer immediately.

SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITYCONTROL)If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control(ESC), this message displays and a chime soundsif there has been a problem detected with ESC.The ESC light also appears on the instrumentpanel cluster. This light stays on solid as long asthe detected problem remains present. Whenthis message displays, the system is not working.Adjust your driving accordingly. See ElectronicStability Control on page 256 and ElectronicStability Control Indicator Light on page 197 formore information.

If this message turns on while you are driving,pull off the road as soon as possible andstop carefully. Try resetting the system by turningthe ignition off and then back on. If this messagestill stays on or turns back on again while you aredriving, your vehicle needs service. Have theESC inspected by your retailer as soon aspossible.

SERVICE TRACTIONIf your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System(ETS) or the Traction Control System (TCS),this message displays and a chime sounds whenthe system is not functioning properly. The ETSor TCS light also appears on the instrument panelcluster. This light stays on solid as long as thedetected problem remains present. Whenthis message displays, the system is not working.Adjust your driving accordingly. See EnhancedTraction System (ETS) on page 255 or TractionControl System (TCS) on page 253 and EnhancedTraction System Warning Light on page 197 orTraction Control System (TCS) Warning Light onpage 196 for more information. Have the systemserviced by your retailer as soon as possible.

TRACTION OFFIf your vehicle has the Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) or the Traction Control System(TCS), this message displays and the ETS orTCS light on the instrument panel clustercomes on solid when the system is turned off.

210

Adjust your driving accordingly. See EnhancedTraction System (ETS) on page 255 or TractionControl System (TCS) on page 253 and EnhancedTraction System Warning Light on page 197 orTraction Control System (TCS) Warning Light onpage 196 for more information.

TRUNK AJARThis message displays when the trunk is notclosed completely. Make sure that the trunk isclosed completely. See Trunk on page 106for more information.

DIC Vehicle PersonalizationYour vehicle has personalization capabilities thatallow you to program certain features to a preferredsetting. All of the features listed may not beavailable on your vehicle. Only the featuresavailable will be displayed on the DIC.The default settings for the features were setwhen your vehicle left the factory, but may havebeen changed from their default state sincethat time.

To change feature settings, use the followingprocedure:

Entering Personalization Menu1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is

stopped.To avoid excessive drain on the battery,it is recommended that the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press and hold the information and resetbuttons at the same time for one second, thenrelease to enter the personalization menu.If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph(3 km/h), only the UNITS menu will beaccessible.

3. Press the information button to scroll throughthe available personalization menu modes.Press the reset button to scroll throughthe available settings for each mode.If you do not make a selection withinten seconds, the display will go back to theprevious information displayed.

211

Personalization Menu ModesOIL LIFE RESETWhen this feature is displayed, you can reset theengine oil life system. To reset the system,see Engine Oil Life System on page 315. See“OIL LIFE” under DIC Operation and Displays onpage 205 for more information.

UNITSThis feature allows you to select the units ofmeasurement in which the DIC will display thevehicle information. When UNITS appears on thedisplay, press and hold the reset button for atleast one second to scroll through the availablesettings:

ENGLISH (default in United States): Allinformation will be displayed in English units.

METRIC (default in Canada): All information willbe displayed in metric units.

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe information button to select it and move on tothe next feature.

REMOTE STARTIf your vehicle has remote start, this feature allowsremote start to be turned off or on. Remote startallows you to start the engine from outside ofthe vehicle using your Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter. When REMOTE STARTappears on the display, press and hold the resetbutton for at least one second to scroll through theavailable settings:

OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.

ON (default): The remote start feature willbe enabled.

See “Remote Vehicle Start” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 96for more information.


212

LOCK HORNIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),this feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn tochirp every time the lock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.When LOCK HORN appears on the display,press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on thefirst press of the lock button on the RKEtransmitter. The horn will still chirp on the secondpress.

ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of thelock button on the RKE transmitter.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 96 for more information.


UNLOCK HORNIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),this feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn tochirp on the first press of the unlock button on theRKE transmitter, can be enabled or disabled.When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display,press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when theunlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.

ON: The horn will chirp on the first press ofthe unlock button on the RKE transmitter.



213

LIGHT FLASHIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),this feature, which allows the vehicle’s exteriorhazard/turn signal lighting to flash every time thelock, unlock, or trunk release buttons on theRKE transmitter are pressed, can be enabled ordisabled. When LIGHT FLASH appears onthe display, press and hold the reset button for atleast one second to scroll through the availablesettings:

OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting willnot flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk releasebuttons on the RKE transmitter are pressed.

ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signallighting will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunkrelease buttons on the RKE transmitter arepressed.



DELAY LOCKThis feature, which delays the actual locking of thevehicle, can be enabled or disabled. WhenDELAY LOCK appears on the display, press andhold the reset button for at least one secondto scroll through the available settings:

ON (default): The doors will not lock untilfive seconds after the last door is closed. You cantemporarily override delayed locking by pressingthe power lock switch or the lock button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter asecond time.

OFF: The doors will lock immediately whenpressing the power lock switch or the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter.

See Power Door Locks on page 103, DelayedLocking on page 103, and Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation on page 96 for moreinformation.


214

AUTO UNLK (Unlock)This feature, which allows the vehicle toautomatically unlock certain doors, can be enabledor disabled. When AUTO UNLK appears on thedisplay, press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

ALL (default): All of the doors will automaticallyunlock.

DRIVER: The driver’s door will automaticallyunlock.

NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock.You will need to manually unlock the doors.

See Programmable Automatic Door Locks onpage 104 for more information.


UNLK (Unlock)This screen displays only if DRIVER or ALL isselected for the AUTO UNLK feature. This featuredetermines when the automatic door unlockingwill occur. When UNLK appears on the display,press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the keyis turned off.

SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

See Programmable Automatic Door Locks onpage 104 for more information.


215

EXT (Exterior) LIGHTSIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),this feature, which allows the vehicle’s exteriorperimeter lighting to turn on each time the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter is pressed, canbe enabled or disabled. When EXT LIGHTSappears on the display, press and hold the resetbutton for at least one second to scroll through theavailable settings:

OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turnon when the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed.

ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting willturn on when the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed.



LANGUAGEThis feature allows you to select the language inwhich the DIC will display. When LANGUAGEappears on the display, press and hold the resetbutton for at least one second to scroll through theavailable settings:

ENGLISH (default): The DIC will display allinformation in English.

FRENCH: The DIC will display all information inFrench.

SPANISH: The DIC will display all information inSpanish.

GERMAN: The DIC will display all information inGerman.Choose one of the available settings and pressthe information button to select it and exit outof the personalization menu mode.

Exiting Personalization MenuThe personalization menu will be exited when anyof the following conditions occur:• A ten second time period has elapsed.• The ignition is turned off.• The end of the personalization menu list is

reached.

216

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. See Defensive Driving on page 246.Here are some ways in which you can helpavoid distraction while driving.While your vehicle is parked:• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipment toyour vehicle, such as an audio system, CDplayer, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-wayradio, make sure that it can be added bychecking with your dealer/retailer. Also, checkfederal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can beadded, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere with theoperation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, orother systems, and even damage them. Yourvehicle’s systems may interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that hasbeen added.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignitionis turned off. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 118 for more information.

217

Setting the TimeIf your vehicle has a radio with a single CD player,the radio has a H (clock) button for setting thetime and date.

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, andyear) displays.

3. Press the pushbutton located under anyone of the labels that you want to change.Every time the pushbutton is pressed again,the time or the date if selected, increasesby one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right ¨ SEEK arrow or \FWD (forward) button.

• To decrease the time or date, press the left© SEEK arrow or s REV (reverse)button, or turn the f (tune) knob, locatedon the upper right side of the radio.

The date does not automatically display. The onlyway to see the date is by pressing the H buttonwhile the radio is on. The date with displaytimes out after a few seconds and goes back tothe normal radio and time display.

If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CDplayer, the radio has a MENU button instead ofthe clock button to set the time and date.

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press the MENU button. Once the clockoption displays.

218

3. Press the pushbutton located under that label.The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.

4. Press the pushbutton located under anyone of the labels that you want to change.Every time the pushbutton is pressed again,the time or the date if selected, increasesby one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right ¨ SEEK arrow or \FWD (forward) button.

• To decrease the time or date, press the left© SEEK arrow or s REV (reverse)button, or turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio.

The date does not automatically display. The onlyway to see the date is by pressing the MENUbutton and then the H button while the radio is on.The date with display times out after a fewseconds and goes back to the normal radio andtime display.

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour or to change the date default settingfrom month/day/year to day/month/year, followthese instructions:

1. Press the H button and then the pushbuttonlocated under the forward arrow label. Oncethe time 12H and 24H, and the dateMM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year) andDD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option.

3. Press the clock or MENU button again toapply the selected default, or let the screentime out.

219

Radio with CD (MP3)

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).The RDS feature is available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information. Thissystem relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and only works when theinformation is available. While the radio is tuned toan FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters

display. In rare cases, a radio station can broadcastincorrect information that causes the radio featuresto work improperly. If this happens, contact theradio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press the O (power) knobto turn the system on and off.

Turn the O(volume) knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decreasethe volume.

Radio with CD shown, Radio withSix-Disc CD similar

220

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radiohas Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). WhileSCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjuststo compensate for road and wind noise asdriving speed changes. That way, the volume levelshould sound about the same as you drive. Toactivate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.

2. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTOVOLUM label on the radio display.

4. Press the pushbutton under the desired SpeedCompensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,or High) to select the level of radio volumecompensation. The display times out afterapproximately 10 seconds. Each higher settingallows for more radio volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The selection displays.

f (Tune): Turn the f knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left © or right ¨ SEEKarrow to go to the previous or to the nextstation and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either the left ©or right ¨ SEEK arrow for a few seconds untila beep sounds. The radio goes to a station, playsfor a few seconds, then goes to the next station.Press either the left © or right ¨ SEEKarrow again to stop scanning.

The radio seeks and scans stations only with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the 4 buttonto display additional text information related to thecurrent FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3 song.A choice of additional information such as:Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT can appear.Continue pressing the 4 button to highlightthe desired label, or press the pushbuttonpositioned under any one of the labels and theinformation about that label displays.

While information is not available, No Info displays.

221

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune toyour favorite stations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls if thevehicle has this feature. See Defensive Driving onpage 246.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations canbe programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations available per page.Each page of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite, performthe following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil a beep sounds. When that pushbuttonis pressed and released, the station that wasset, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages can be setup usingthe MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:


2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original main radioscreen showing the radio station frequencylabels and to begin the process ofprogramming your favorites for the chosenamount of numbered pages.

222

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, orTreble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble,press the f knob until the tone control labelsdisplay. Continue pressing to highlight the desiredlabel, or press the pushbutton positioned underthe desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to adjust the highlightedsetting. The highlighted setting can also beadjusted by pressing either the left © or right ¨SEEK arrow, \ FWD (forward) or s REV(reverse) button until the desired levels areobtained. If a station’s frequency is weak, or hasstatic, decrease the treble.To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds and the leveladjusts to the middle position.To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press the f knob for morethan two seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press the EQbutton until Manual displays or start to manuallyadjust the bass, midrange, or treble by pressingthe f knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balanceor fade, press the f knob until the speaker controllabels display. Continue pressing to highlight thedesired label, or press the pushbutton positionedunder the desired label. Turn the f knobclockwise or counterclockwise to adjust thehighlighted setting. The highlighted setting canalso be adjusted by pressing either the left © orright ¨ SEEK arrow, \ FWD or s REVbutton until the desired levels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned underthe BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and the level adjusts to themiddle position.

To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls tothe middle position, press the f knob for more thantwo seconds until a beep sounds.

223

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations while the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency displays. Press the CAT button todisplay the category labels. Continue pressingthe CAT button until the desired categoryname displays.

2. Press either of the two buttons below thedesired category label to immediately tuneto the first XM™ station associated with thatcategory.

3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below theright or left arrows displayed, or press the left© or right ¨ SEEK arrow to go to theprevious or to the next XM™ station within theselected category.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:


2. Press the pushbutton located below the XMCAT label.

3. Turn the f knob to display the category youwant removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category displays or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

Categories cannot be removed or added while thevehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).

224

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly and yourvehicle must be returned to your dealer/retailer forservice.

Locked: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 236 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)

LOAD ^: Press the LOAD ^ button to load CDsinto the CD player. This CD player holds up tosix CDs.To insert one CD, do the following:1. Press and release the LOAD ^ button.2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into

the slot, label side up. The player pulls theCD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:1. Press and hold the LOAD ^ button for

two seconds. A beep sounds and LoadAll Discs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when toinsert the discs. The CD player takes up tosix CDs.

3. Press the LOAD ^ button again to cancelloading more CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. While the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

225

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displayson the CD. As each new track starts to play,the track number displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R or CD-RW, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R or CD-RW quality,the method of recording, the quality of themusic that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R or CD-RW has been handled. There can bean increase in skipping, difficulty in findingtracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. Ifthese problems occur, check the bottom surface ofthe CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD willnot play properly. If the surface of the CD issoiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 243 formore information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, use onlyCDs in good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free of foreign materials,liquids, and debris.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

Z EJECT: Press the Z EJECT button to ejectCD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,press and release the Z EJECT button. A beepsounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once thedisc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CDcan be removed. If the CD is not removed,after several seconds, the CD automatically pullsback into the player and begins playing.

226

For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold theZ EJECT button for two seconds to ejectall discs.

f (Tune): Turn the f knob to select tracks onthe CD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left © SEEK arrow togo to the start of the current track, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right ¨ SEEKarrow to go to the next track. If either the left © orright ¨ SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multipletimes, the player continues moving backward orforward through the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold the s

REV button to reverse playback quickly within atrack. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.Release the s REV button to resume playingthe track. The elapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and holdthe s FWD button to advance playback quicklywithin a track. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release the s FWD button to resumeplaying the track. The elapsed time of thetrack displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, thetracks can be listened to in random, ratherthan sequential order, on one CD or all CDs in asix-disc CD player. To use random, do one ofthe following:

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CDplayer, insert a disc partway into the slot ofthe CD player. A RDM label displays.To play the tracks from the single CD inrandom order, press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM label until Random CurrentDisc displays. Press the pushbutton again toturn off random play.

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CDplayer, press and hold the LOAD ^ button. Abeep sounds and Load All Discs displays.Insert one or more discs partway into the slotof the CD player.To play tracks from all CDs loaded in asix-disc CD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDMlabel until Randomize All Discs displays. Pressthe same pushbutton again to turn offrandom play.

227

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberdisplays when a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, No Input Device Found displays.

Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscIf your radio system has a single CD (MP3) playeror a six-disc CD (MP3) player, it is capable ofplaying an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For moreinformation on how to play an MP3 CD-R orCD-RW disc, see Using an MP3 on page 229 laterin this section.

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If this message displays and/orthe CD ejects, it could be for one of the followingreasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If theradio displays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer/retailer while reportingthe problem.

228

Using the Auxiliary Input JackThe radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.However, an external audio device such asan iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CDchanger, or cassette tape player, etc. can beconnected to the auxiliary input jack for use asanother source for audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 246 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, press theradio CD/AUX button to begin playing audiofrom the device over the vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn the O knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. Additionalvolume adjustments might be needed from theportable device if the volume is not loud orsoft enough.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmight want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player is notconnected, No Input Device Found displays.

Using an MP3

MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recordedwith the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.Song title, artist name, and album are available fordisplay by the radio when recorded using ID3tags version 1 and 2.

229

Compressed AudioThe radio also plays discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3files. By default the radio reads only theuncompressed audio and ignore the MP3 files.Pressing the CAT button toggles betweencompressed and uncompressed audio format.

MP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• The CD player is able to read and play amaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and255 files.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to8 subfolders deep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum in order toreduce the complexity and confusion in trying tolocate a particular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension (other file extensions mightnot work).

• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlistnames. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or acombination of a large number of files andfolders, or playlists can cause the player to beunable to play up to the maximum number offiles, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wishto play a large number of files, folders, playlists,or sessions, minimize the length of the file,folder, or playlist name. Long names also takeup more space on the display, potentiallygetting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.Trying to add music to an existing disc cancause the disc not to function in the player.

230

Playlists can be changed by using the previousand next folder buttons, the f knob, or the seekbuttons. An MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that wasrecorded using no file folders can also be played.If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more than themaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files,the player lets you access and navigate up tothe maximum, but all items over the maximum arenot accessible.

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW istreated as a folder. If the root directory hascompressed audio files, the directory is displayedas F1 ROOT. All files contained directly underthe root directory are accessed prior to any rootdirectory folders. However, playlists (Px) arealways accessed before root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains onlyfolders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen the CD-R or CD-RW contains onlycompressed files, the files are located under theroot folder. The next and previous folder functionsdo not display on a CD-R that was recordedwithout folders or playlists. When displaying thename of the folder the radio displays ROOT.

When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only playlistsand compressed audio files, but no folders, allfiles are located under the root folder. The folderdown and the folder up buttons search playlists(Px) first and then goes to the root folder.When the radio displays the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

231

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW areplayed in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the firstfolder and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. When the last track ofthe last folder has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessyou have chosen the folder mode as the defaultdisplay. The new track name displays.

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song namethat is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name isnot present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displaysthe file name without the extension (suchas .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. The display does notshow parts of words on the last page of textand the extension of the filename does not display.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CDPlayer), or press the load button and wait for themessage to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player),label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-Ror CD-RW should begin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R orCD-RW in the player, it stays in the player.When either are turned back on, the CD-R startsto play where it stopped, if it was the lastselected audio source.

232

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title displays.

Z EJECT: Press this button to eject CD-R(s) orCD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that iscurrently playing, press and release this button. Abeep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Oncethe disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays.The CD-R or CD-RW can be removed. If theCD-R or CD-RW is not removed, after severalseconds, the CD-R or CD-RW automatically pullsback into the player and begins playing. Forthe Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the ejectbutton for two seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files onthe CD-R or CD-RW currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current MP3 file, if more than10 seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next MP3 file. If eitherSEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times, theplayer continues moving backward or forwardthrough MP3 files on the CD.

S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within an MP3file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Releasethis button to resume playing the file. Theelapsed time of the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within an MP3file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the file. Theelapsed time of the file displays.

233

RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened toin random, rather than sequential order, onone CD-R/CD-RW or all discs in a six-disc CDplayer. To use random, do one of the following:

1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R or CD-RW inrandom order, press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM label until Random CurrentDisc displays. Press the same pushbuttonagain to turn off random play.

2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-discCD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW inorder by artist or album. Press the pushbuttonlocated below the music navigator label. The playerscans the disc to sort the files by artist and albumID3 tag information. It can take several minutes toscan the disc depending on the number of MP3 filesrecorded to the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio canbegin playing while it is scanning the disc in thebackground. When the scan is finished, the CD-Ror CD-RW begins playing again.

234

Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults toplaying MP3 files in order by artist. The currentartist playing is shown on the second line of thedisplay between the arrows. Once all songs by thatartist are played, the player moves to the next artistin alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW andbegins playing MP3 files by that artist. To listen toMP3 files by another artist, press the pushbuttonlocated below either arrow button. The CD goes tothe next or previous artist in alphabetical order.Continue pressing either button until the desiredartist displays.

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum, press the pushbutton located below the SortBy label. From the sort screen, push one of thebuttons below the album button. Press thepushbutton below the back label to return to themain music navigator screen. Now the album nameis displayed on the second line between the arrowsand songs from the current album begins to play.

Once all songs from that album are played, theplayer moves to the next album in alphabeticalorder on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playingMP3 files from that album.

To exit the music navigator mode, press thepushbutton below the Back label to return to normalMP3 playback.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberdisplays while a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, No Input Device Found displays.

235

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (ExplicitLanguage Channels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after four second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune toanother channel.

Channel Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Title Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

236

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No CAT Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Information No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

CAT Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM TheftLocked Theftlock® active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If thismessage appears after having your vehicle serviced, checkwith your dealer/retailer.

XM Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, therecould be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with yourdealer/retailer.

XM Not Available XM™ Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with yourdealer/retailer.

237

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)Your vehicle might have rear seat audio (RSA).This feature lets rear seat passengers listen to andcontrol any of the sources, such as the radio orCD(s). An audio or radio source can be listened tobut cannot be changed from the rear seat if the frontseat passengers have selected the same sourcefrom the front seat controls. For example, the radiostation selected with the front seat controls cannotbe changed by the rear seat control(s).

The front seat audio controls always have priorityover the RSA controls. If the front seatpassengers switch to the same source as theRSA, the RSA no longer controls the source.

The RSA can be operated while the main radiois off.

The wired headphones (not included) or thewireless headphones (included) can be heard.Wired headphones connect to the outlets on theRSA system. The rear seat passengers havecontrol of the volume for each set of wiredheadphones.

Adjust the volume on the wireless headphones byturning the volume control on each headset.

Rear Seat Audio ControlsThe following function is controlled by themain radio:

Front seat passengers can turn the RSA off byquickly pressing the front radio power knob twice.

The following functions are controlled by theRSA system:

n (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume. The left knob controlsthe left wired headphones and the right knobcontrols the right wired headphones.

O (Power): Press this button to turn the systemon or off. The rear speakers are muted whenthe RSA power is turned on.

238

SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a CDwhen listening to the radio. If your vehicle has asix-disc CD player and other CDs are loaded, theinactive CDs remains inside the radio for futurelistening.

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).

1–6 (Preset): Press this button to go to the nextpreset radio station. This function is inactive ifthe front seat passengers are listening to the radio.

While a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,press this button to select the next CD, ifmultiple CDs are loaded. This function is inactive ifthe front seat passengers are listening to a CD.

©¨ (Seek): While listening to the radio,press the seek arrows to go to the next or theprevious station and stay there. This function isinactive if the front seat passengers are listening tothe radio.

While a CD is playing, press the left seek arrow togo to the start of the current track if more thaneight seconds have played. Press the right seekarrow to go to the next track on the CD. Thisfunction is inactive if the front seat passengers arelistening to a CD.

HeadphonesThe RSA includes two wireless headphones thatare dedicated to this system. These headphonesare used to listen to media such as CDs orradio. The wireless headphones have an On/Offbutton and a volume control.

Push the power button to turn on the headphones.An indicator light located on the headphonescomes on. If the light does not come on,the batteries might need to be replaced. See“Battery Replacement” later in this section for moreinformation. Switch the headphones to Off whennot in use.

Infrared transmitters are located on the rear seataudio faceplate. The headphones shut offautomatically to save the battery power if the RSAshuts off or if the headphones are out of rangeof the transmitters for more than three minutes. Ifyou move too far forward or step out of thevehicle, the headphones lose the audio signal.

The headphones automatically turn off afterfour hours of continuous use.

To adjust the volume on the headphones, use thevolume control located on the right side.

239

For optimal audio performance, the headphonesmust be worn correctly. The symbol L (Left)appears on the upper left side, above the ear padand should be positioned on the left ear. Thesymbol R (Right) appears on the upper right side,above the ear pad and should be positioned onthe right ear.

Notice: Do not store the headphones in heator direct sunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will not be covered byyour warranty. Keep the headphones storedin a cool, dry place.

If the foam ear pads attached to the headphonesbecome worn or damaged, the pads can bereplaced separately from the headphone set.Contact your dealer/retailer for more information.

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries on the headphones, dothe following:

1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery doorlocated on the left side of the headphones.Slide the battery door open.

2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.Make sure that they are installed correctly,using the diagram on the inside of the batterycompartment.

3. Replace the battery door and tighten thedoor screw.

If the headphones are to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

240

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft ofyour vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio ismoved to a different vehicle, it does not operateand LOCKED displays.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio cannotoperate if stolen.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Radio controls arelocated on the right sideof the steering wheel.If your vehicle hasthis feature, some audiocontrols can beadjusted at this location.

They include the following:

+ − (Volume): Press the plus or minus button toincrease or to decrease the volume.

©¨: Press the seek arrows to go to theprevious or the next stored radio station and staythere. Press and hold the seek arrows brieflyto reverse back to the previous station orto advance to the next station, with a strong signalin the selected band.

While a CD is playing, press the seek arrows togo to the previous or to the next track. Press andhold the seek arrows briefly to continue reversingback or advancing ahead to other tracks withinthe disc.

g (Mute/Voice Activation): Press this button tomute the system. Press this button again toturn the sound on. If your vehicle has OnStar®,press and hold this button for two secondsto activate voice on the OnStar® system. See theOnStar® System on page 135 in this manualfor more information.

241

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and static can occurduring normal radio reception if items such as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience accessories,and external electronic devices are pluggedinto the accessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other. Forbetter radio reception, most AM radio stationsboosts the power levels during the day, and thenreduce these levels during the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. When this happens,try reducing the treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signalsonly reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tallbuildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or through tunnels couldcause loss of the XM™ signal for a period oftime. The radio might display NO XM SIGNAL toindicate interference.

242

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rearwindow defogger, located in the rear window. Makesure that the inside surface of the rear window isnot scratched and that the lines on the glass are notdamaged. If the inside surface is damaged, it couldinterfere with radio reception. Also, for proper radioreception, the antenna connector at the top-centerof the rear window needs to be properly attached tothe post on the glass.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tintingwith metallic film. The metallic film in sometinting materials will interfere with or distort theincoming radio reception. Any damagecaused to your backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials will not be coveredby your warranty.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object toclear the inside rear window may damagethe rear window antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Do not clear theinside rear window with sharp objects.

243

Because this antenna is built into the rear window,there is a reduced risk of damage caused bycar washes and vandals.

If static is heard on the radio, when the rearwindow defogger is turned on, it could mean thata defogger grid line has been damaged andthe grid line must be repaired.

If adding a cellular telephone to your vehicle, andthe antenna needs to be attached to the glass,make sure that you do not damage the grid linesfor the AM-FM antenna. There is enough spacebetween the lines to attach a cellular telephoneantenna without interfering with radio reception.

XM™ Satellite RadioAntenna SystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

A vehicle with a sunroof might not get thebest performance from the XM™ system if thesunroof is open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.

244

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle ............................................ 246Defensive Driving ...................................... 246Drunken Driving ........................................ 247Control of a Vehicle .................................. 250Braking ...................................................... 250Antilock Brake System (ABS) .................... 251Braking in Emergencies ............................. 253Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 253Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .............. 255Electronic Stability Control ......................... 256Steering .................................................... 259Off-Road Recovery .................................... 261Passing ..................................................... 261Loss of Control .......................................... 263Driving at Night ......................................... 264

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 266City Driving ............................................... 268Freeway Driving ........................................ 269Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 270Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 271Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 272Winter Driving ........................................... 274If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .......................................... 278Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 278Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 279

Towing ........................................................ 284Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 284Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 284Towing a Trailer ........................................ 287

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

245

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 18.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

246

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the number onecontributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol,with more than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

247

According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.A person who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage of bodywater than men. Since alcohol is carried in bodywater, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of her samebody weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both Franceand Germany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

248

But the ability to drive is affected well below aBAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows thatthe driving skills of many people are impaired at aBAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that theeffects are worse at night. All drivers are impairedat BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statisticsshow that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance ofhaving a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,the chance of this driver having a collision is12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent,the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC mightnot be able to react quickly enough to avoidthe collision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive after drinking.Please do not drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking. Ride home ina cab; or if you are with a group, designatea driver who will not drink.

249

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering, and the accelerator. All three systemshave to do their work at the places where the tiresmeet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 253 andElectronic Stability Control on page 256.

Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 297.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 194.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It mightbe less with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination, and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, andfrustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

250

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not havetime to cool between hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavybraking. If you keep pace with the traffic andallow realistic following distances, you willeliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.

Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 297.

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system thatwill help prevent a braking skid.

When you start the engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You might heara momentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on, and you might even notice that thebrake pedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problemwith ABS, this warninglight will stay on.See Antilock BrakeSystem Warning Lighton page 195.

251

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachwheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, the computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

252

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you will nothave time to apply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let antilock work for you.You might hear the antilock pump or motoroperate, and feel the brake pedal pulsate, but thisis normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System(TCS) that limits wheel spin. This is especiallyuseful in slippery road conditions. The systemoperates only if it senses that one or both of thefront wheels are spinning or beginning to losetraction. When this happens, the system reducesengine power and may also upshift thetransmission to limit wheel spin. You may feel orhear the system working, but this is normal.Also, the traction control system activates theappropriate corner brakes to gain even quickercontrol to limit wheel spin. The LOW TRACTIONmessage will appear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) when the traction control systemis limiting wheel spin.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when thetraction control system begins to limit wheel spin,the cruise control will automatically disengage.When road conditions allow you to safely useit again, you may re-engage the cruise control.See Cruise Control on page 167.

253

The TCS operates in all transmission shift leverpositions except PARK (P), NEUTRAL (N) orREVERSE (R). But the system can upshiftthe transmission only as high as the shift leverposition you’ve chosen, so you should usethe lower gears only when necessary. SeeAutomatic Transaxle Operation on page 122.

This light is located onthe instrument panelcluster.

When the system is on, this warning light willcome on to let you know if there’s a problem, or ifthe system has been turned off. When this lightis on, the system will not limit wheel spin.Adjust your driving accordingly.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave the TCS on.But you can turn the system off if you prefer.To turn the system on or off, press the tractioncontrol button (TC) located on the center console.In order to effectively “rock” the vehicle, youwill need to turn off TCS.

If you press the TC button once, the TCS will turnoff, the TRACTION OFF message will displayand the TCS warning light will come on. TheStabiliTrak® system will stay on. Press theTC button again to turn the system back on.The TCS warning light will go off. If you press andhold the TC button, the StabiliTrak® system andthe traction control system will turn off. Pressthe TC button again to turn StabiliTrak® and thetraction control system back on. For moreinformation, see Electronic Stability Control onpage 256.

When you turn the system off, the TCS warninglight will come on and stay on. If the TractionControl System is limiting wheel spin when youpress the button to turn the system off, the warninglight will come on – but the system won’t turn offright away. It will wait until there’s no longer acurrent need to limit wheel spin.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessoriescan affect your vehicle’s performance.See Accessories and Modifications onpage 297 for more information.

254

Enhanced Traction System (ETS)Your vehicle may have an Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) that limits wheel spin. This isespecially useful in slippery road conditions.The system operates only if it senses that one orboth of the front wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When this happens, thesystem reduces engine power and may alsoupshift the transmission to limit wheel spin. Youmay feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal. The LOW TRACTION messagewill appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)when the traction control system is limitingwheel spin.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when theenhanced traction system begins to limit wheelspin, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. When road conditions allow you tosafely use it again, you may re-engage the cruisecontrol. See Cruise Control on page 167.

The Enhanced Traction System operates in alltransmission shift lever positions except PARK (P),NEUTRAL (N) or REVERSE (R). But the systemcan upshift the transmission only as high asthe shift lever position you’ve chosen, so youshould use the lower gears only when necessary.See Automatic Transaxle Operation on page 122.

This light is located onthe instrument panelcluster.

When the system is on, this light will come on andstay on to let you know if there’s a problem, orif the system has been turned off. When this lightis on, the system will not limit wheel spin.Adjust your driving accordingly.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave the ETS on.But you can turn the system off if you prefer.

255

To turn the system on or off, press the tractioncontrol button (TC) located on the center console.In order to effectively “rock” the vehicle, youwill need to turn off the traction control system.

When you turn the system off, the ETS warninglight will come on and stay on and the TRACTIONOFF message will display. If the ETS is limitingwheel spin when you press the button to turn thesystem off, the warning light will come on – butthe system won’t turn off right away. It will waituntil there’s no longer a current need to limitwheel spin.

You can turn the system back on at any time bypressing the button again. The ETS warninglight should go off.

Electronic Stability ControlYour vehicle may have an Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system which combines antilockbrake, traction and stability control systemsand helps the driver maintain directional control ofthe vehicle in most driving conditions.

When you first start your vehicle and begin to driveaway, the system performs several diagnosticchecks to ensure there are no problems. You mayhear or feel the system working. This is normal anddoes not mean there is a problem with your vehicle.The system should initialize before the vehiclereaches 20 mph (32 km/h). In some cases, it maytake approximately two miles of driving before thesystem initializes.

The ESC light is locatedon the instrument panelcluster.

256

If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESClight will be on solid, and the ESC OFF orSERVICE ESC message will be displayed in theDIC. If the vehicle has gone through heavyacceleration or braking during the first two milesafter starting your vehicle, these messages and theESC light may also appear. If this is the case,your vehicle does not need servicing. Turn yourvehicle off and back on again to reset the system.If the SERVICE ESC message appears on theDriver Information Center (DIC), and your vehiclehasn’t gone through hard acceleration or brakingin the first two miles, your vehicle should be takenin for service.

When the ESC off light is on and either theSERVICE ESC or ESC OFF message is displayed,the system will not assist the driver to maintaindirectional control of the vehicle. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 206.

The traction control part of ESC can be turned off orback on by pressing the ESC button. To disableboth traction control and ESC, press and hold thebutton briefly.

When the system is turned off, the TRACTIONOFF message will first appear followed by the ESCOFF message. The ESC OFF and TCS OFFindicator lights will also appear to warn the driverthat both traction control and ESC are disabled.

It is recommended to leave the system onfor normal driving conditions, but it may benecessary to turn the system off if your vehicle isstuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, and you wantto “rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it. It mayalso be necessary to turn off the system whendriving in extreme off-road conditions where highwheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle isStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 278.

ESC may also turn off automatically if it determinesthat a problem exists with the system. The ESCOFF and SERVICE ESC messages and the ESCOFF light will be on solid to warn the driver thatESC is disabled and requires service. If the problemdoes not clear itself after restarting the vehicle, youshould see your retailer for service. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 206.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories canaffect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 297.

257

Traction Control OperationThe traction control system is part of the ESCsystem. Traction control limits wheel spin byreducing engine power to the wheels (enginespeed management) and by applying brakes toeach individual wheel (brake-traction control)as necessary.

The traction control system is enabledautomatically when you start your vehicle, and itwill activate and display the LOW TRACTIONmessage if it senses that any of the wheels arespinning or beginning to lose traction while driving.If you turn off traction control, the TCS OFFwarning light will come on and the TRACTIONOFF message will be displayed The ESC systemwill remain operational unless it is turned off.For more information on the traction activemessage, see Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 204.

Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axleto spin excessively while the ESC, ABS andbrake warning lights and the SERVICE ESCmessage are displayed, you could damagethe transfer case. The repairs would not be

covered by your warranty. Reduce enginepower and do not spin the wheel(s) excessivelywhile these lights and this message aredisplayed.

The traction control system may activate ondry or rough roads or under conditions such asheavy acceleration while turning or abruptupshifts/downshifts of the transmission. When thishappens, you may notice a reduction inacceleration, or may hear a noise or vibration.This is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the systemactivates, the ESC ACTIVE message will appearand the cruise control will automatically disengage.When road conditions allow you to use cruiseagain, you may re-engage the cruise control.See Cruise Control on page 167.

ESC may also turn off automatically if it determinesthat a problem exists with the system. If theproblem does not clear itself after restarting thevehicle, you should see your retailer for service.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessoriescan affect your vehicle’s performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications on page 297 formore information.

258

SteeringIf your vehicle has the hydraulic power steeringsystem and you lose power steering assistbecause the engine stops or the power steeringsystem is not functioning, you can steer, but it willtake much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentionedon the news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of the tires and the road surface,the angle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have todo their work where the tires meet the road.Adding the sudden acceleration can demand toomuch of those places. You can lose control.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 253and Electronic Stability Control on page 256.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the brake or accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” throughthe curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve,and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories canaffect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 297.

259

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, ora child darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoidthese problems by braking — if you can stop intime. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply the brakes. See Brakingon page 250. It is better to remove as much speedas you can from a possible collision. Then steeraround the problem, to the left or right dependingon the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

260

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your vehicle’s right wheels havedropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulderwhile you are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steeringwheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with the worstof all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

261

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,and lines. If you can see a sign up aheadthat might indicate a turn or an intersection,delay your pass. A broken center lineusually indicates it is all right to pass, providingthe road ahead is clear. Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a double solidline, even if the road seems empty ofapproaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you wantto pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.For one thing, following too closely reducesyour area of vision, especially if you arefollowing a larger vehicle. Also, you will nothave adequate space if the vehicle aheadsuddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the rightlane and do not get too close. Time your moveso you will be increasing speed as the timecomes to move into the other lane. If the wayis clear to pass, you will have a runningstart that more than makes up for the distanceyou would lose by dropping back. And ifsomething happens to cause you to cancelyour pass, you need only slow down and dropback again and wait for another opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatan outside convex mirror makes the vehicle youjust passed seem farther away from you than itreally is.

262

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it might be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,the wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

Remember: Any traction control system helpsavoid only the acceleration skid. If your tractioncontrol system is off, then an accelerationskid is also best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

263

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction,try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)helps avoid only the braking skid.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, slow down andkeep more space between you and othervehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up onlyso much road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

264

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver might require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They might cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make a lotof things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far lessof a roadway when you are in a turn or curve.Keep your eyes moving; that way, it is easierto pick out dimly lighted objects. Just asthe headlamps should be checked regularlyfor proper aim, so should your eyes beexamined regularly. Some drivers suffer fromnight blindness — the inability to see indim light —and are not even aware of it.

265

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble.On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turnas well because your tire-to-road traction is notas good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not

have much tread left, you will get even lesstraction. It is always wise to go slower and becautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.The surface may get wet suddenly when yourreflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield, orwhen strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.

266

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply the brake pedallightly until the brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot,try to slow down before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it canif your tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple thewater’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing WaterNotice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through the engine’s air intakeand badly damage the engine. Never drivethrough water that is slightly lower than theunderbody of your vehicle. If you cannot avoiddeep puddles or standing water, drivethrough them very slowly.

267

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carriedaway. As little as six inches of flowingwater can carry away a smaller vehicle.If this happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignorepolice warning signs, and otherwise bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 348.

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

268

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 269.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a lightturns green, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

269

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on afreeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — such asafter a day’s work — do not plan to make too manymiles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortableclothing and shoes you can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out.

270

Of course, you will find experienced and ableservice experts at dealers/retailers all across theUnited States and Canada. They are readyand willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep atthe wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,

with a comfortably cool interior.• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead

and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrorsand your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap,get some exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

271

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes couldget so hot that they would not work well.You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engine assistthe brakes on a steep downhill slope.

272

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. The brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have theengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

273

Winter DrivingHere are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You might want to put winter emergencysupplies in your trunk.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, ared cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 348.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You have a lot less traction, or grip, andneed to be very careful.

274

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itcan offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

If you have the Traction Control System (TCS),it will improve your ability to accelerate whendriving on a slippery road. But you can turn theTCS off if you ever need to. You should turnthe TCS off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand,mud, ice, or snow. See If Your Vehicle is Stuckin Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 278. Even ifyou have TCS, slow down and adjust yourdriving to the road conditions. Under certainconditions, you might want to turn the TCS off,such as when driving through deep snowand loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle motionat lower speeds. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 253 and Electronic Stability Controlon page 256.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,begin stopping sooner than you would on drypavement. See Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 251.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchescan appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy when the surroundingroads are clear. If you see a patch of iceahead of you, brake before you are on it.Try not to brake while you are actually on theice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.

275

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanketaround you. If you do not have blankets orextra clothing, make body insulatorsfrom newspapers, burlap bags, rags,floor mats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

276

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blocking theexhaust pipe. And check around againfrom time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must.This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make itgo a little faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heatthat you get and it keeps the battery charged.You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withthe headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

277

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,you will need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And, the transaxle orother parts of the vehicle can overheat.That could cause an engine compartmentfire or other damage. When you are stuck,spin the wheels as little as possible. Do notspin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) asshown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shifting the

transaxle back and forth, you can destroy thetransaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle to GetIt Out on page 278.For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 369.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right to clearthe area around the front wheels. Turn off anytraction or stability system. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 253 and Electronic StabilityControl on page 256. Then shift back and forthbetween REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,spinning the wheels as little as possible.To prevent transmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shifting gears.Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, andpress lightly on the accelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. By slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that could freeyour vehicle. If that does not get your vehicleout after a few tries, it might need to be towed out.If your vehicle does need to be towed out, seeTowing Your Vehicle on page 284.

278

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight and includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show howmuch weight it may properly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label and the Certification/Tirelabel. Two labels on your vehicle show howmuch weight it may properly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label and the VehicleCertification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the door lock post(striker). The Tire and Loading Information labellists the number of occupant seating positions (A),and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

Label Example

279

The Tire and Loading Information label also liststhe tire size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation, seeTires on page 348 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 356.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle,see “Certification Label” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity for your vehicle.

If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 287 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

280

Item Description Total

AMaximum VehicleCapacity Weight forExample 1 =

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)



1,000 lbs (453 kg)


750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available Cargo Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

281



1,000 lbs (453 kg)


1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available Cargo Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’smaximum vehicle capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is found onthe rear edge of the driver’s door.

The label shows the gross weight capacity of yourvehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo, and tongueweight if pulling a trailer.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or rear axle.

Example 3

282

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

If things like suitcases, tools, packages, oranything else are put inside the vehicle, they willgo as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.In a trunk, put them as far forward asyou can. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

283

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your retailer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 427.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind amotorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle Towing”following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as dinghytowing, towing your vehicle with all four wheels onthe ground, and dolly towing, towing your vehiclewith two wheels on the ground and two wheels upon a device known as a dolly.

With the proper preparation and equipment,many vehicles can be towed in these ways.See “Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to considerbefore you do recreational vehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer/retailer or traileringprofessional for additional advice andequipment recommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you will want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leavingon a Long Trip on page 270.

284

Dinghy TowingWhen dinghy towing, the vehicle should be run atthe beginning of each day and at each RV fuelstop for about five minutes. This will ensure properlubrication of transmission components.

You may dinghy tow your vehicle from the frontfollowing these steps:

1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it.

2. Turn the ignition to OFF.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. To prevent the battery from draining while thevehicle is being towed, remove the followingfuse from the instrument panel fuse block:(IGN SENSOR). See Instrument Panel FuseBlock on page 393 for more information.

5. Turn the ignition key to ACC.

6. Shift your transmission to NEUTRAL (N).

7. Release the parking brake.

Remember to reinstall the IGN SENSOR fuseonce you have reached your destination.

Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) whiletowing your vehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towingyour vehicle.

285

Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rearcould damage it. Also, repairs would notbe covered by the warranty. Never have yourvehicle towed from the rear.

Dolly TowingTo tow your vehicle with two wheels on theground and a dolly:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put the gear shift lever in PARK (P).

3. Set the parking brake and then remove theignition key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition.

5. Release the parking brake.

286

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.You may also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Pull a trailer only if youhave followed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer/retailer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer withyour vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and result in costly repairsnot covered by your warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in this part and seeyour dealer/retailer for important informationabout towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped withthe proper trailer towing equipment. To identifythe trailering capacity of your vehicle, you shouldread the information in “Weight of the Trailer”that appears later in this section. Traileringis different than just driving your vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes in handling, durabilityand fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tiresare forced to work harder against the drag ofthe added weight. The engine is requiredto operate at relatively higher speeds and undergreater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.

287

If You Do Decide to Pull a TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you’ll be driving.A good source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask ahitch retailer about sway controls.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first1000 miles (1600 km) your new vehicleis driven. Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) thatyou tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.This helps your engine and other parts ofyour vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing atrailer. Don’t drive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, or no more than55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on yourvehicle’s parts.

• Don’t tow a trailer when the outsidetemperature is above 100°F (38°C).

Three important considerations have to dowith weight:

• the weight of the trailer,

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs(454 kg). But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig.For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is usedto pull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have on your

288

vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo must be subtracted from the maximumtrailer weight.

You can ask your retailer for trailering informationor advice.

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. And ifyou tow a trailer, you must add the tongue loadto the GVW because your vehicle will be carryingthat weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 279 for more information about your vehicle’smaximum load capacity.

If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailertongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of thetotal loaded trailer weight (B). If you’re using aweight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailerweight (B).

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be ableto get them right simply by moving some itemsaround in the trailer.

289

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upperlimit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on theTire-Loading Information label. See Loading YourVehicle on page 279. Then be sure you don’t goover the GVW limit for your vehicle, including theweight of the trailer tongue.

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you’ll need theright hitch. Here are some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on your vehicle is notintended for hitches. Do not attach rentalhitches or other bumper-type hitches to it.Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does notattach to the bumper.

• Will you have to make any holes in the body ofyour vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?If you do, then be sure to seal the holes laterwhen you remove the hitch. If you don’t sealthem, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from yourexhaust can get into your vehicle. See EngineExhaust on page 130. Dirt and water can, too.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer so that thetongue will not drop to the road if it becomesseparated from the hitch. Instructions about safetychains may be provided by the hitch manufactureror by the trailer manufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains and do not attach them to thebumper. Always leave just enough slack so youcan turn with your rig. And, never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesIf your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, don’t try to tapinto your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If youdo, both brake systems won’t work well, or at all.

Be sure to read and follow the instructions for thetrailer brakes, so you’ll be able to install, adjustand maintain them properly.

290

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer hitch andplatform (and attachments), safety chains,electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirroradjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, startyour vehicle and trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by hand to be sure thebrakes are working. This lets you check yourelectrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re agood deal longer when towing a trailer, you’ll needto go much farther beyond the passed vehiclebefore you can return to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel withone hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, justmove that hand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

291

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailerwon’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need adifferent turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.See your retailer if you need information.The arrows on your instrument panel will flashwhenever you signal a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will alsoflash, telling other drivers you’re about toturn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbson the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may thinkdrivers behind you are seeing your signal whenthey are not. It’s important to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

Driving on GradesNotice: Do not tow on steep continuousgrades exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended,higher than normal engine and transmissiontemperatures may result and damage yourvehicle. Frequent stops are very important toallow the engine and transmission to cool.

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before youstart down a long or steep downgrade. If youdon’t shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduceyour speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reducethe possibility of the engine and the transmissionoverheating. If your engine does overheat,see Engine Overheating on page 325.

292

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park yourvehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.If something goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here’s how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shiftinto PARK (P).When parking uphill, turn your wheels awayfrom the curb. When parking downhill,turn your wheels into the curb.

2. Have someone place chocks behind the trailerwheels.

3. When the chocks are in place, release theregular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake and shift into PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:• start your engine• shift into a gear, and• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.

293

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more oftenwhen you’re pulling a trailer. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 406 for more information.Things that are especially important in traileroperation are automatic transmission fluid(don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant,drive belt, cooling system and brake system.Each of these is covered in this manual, and theIndex will help you find them quickly. If you’retrailering, it’s a good idea to review this informationbefore you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheatduring severe operating conditions. See EngineOverheating on page 325.

Changing a Tire When Trailer TowingIf you get a flat tire while towing a trailer, be sureto secure the trailer and disconnect it from thevehicle before changing the tire.

294

Service ........................................................ 297Accessories and Modifications ................... 297California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 298Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 298Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle .......................................... 299Fuel ............................................................. 299

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 299Gasoline Specifications .............................. 300California Fuel ........................................... 300Additives ................................................... 300Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 301Filling the Tank ......................................... 302Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 305

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 306Hood Release ........................................... 306Engine Compartment Overview .................. 308Engine Oil ................................................. 312Engine Oil Life System .............................. 315Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 317Automatic Transaxle Fluid

(3.5L V6 Engine) .................................... 319Automatic Transaxle Fluid

(3.6L V6 Engine) .................................... 319

Engine Coolant .......................................... 322Pressure Cap ............................................ 325Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 325Engine Overheating ................................... 325Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ..................................... 327Cooling System ......................................... 328Power Steering Fluid ................................. 332Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 334Brakes ...................................................... 335Battery ...................................................... 338Jump Starting ............................................ 339

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 344Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 344Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,

Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps .............. 344License Plate Lamp ................................... 346Replacement Bulbs ................................... 346

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 347Tires ............................................................ 348

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 349Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 353Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 356Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 357

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

295

Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 362When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 363Buying New Tires ...................................... 363Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 365Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 366Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 367Wheel Replacement .................................. 367Tire Chains ............................................... 369If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 369Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 370Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 372Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ............................................. 374Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 379Compact Spare Tire .................................. 381

Appearance Care ........................................ 382Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 382Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 383Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 384Care of Safety Belts .................................. 385Weatherstrips ............................................ 385Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 385

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 385Finish Care ............................................... 386Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 386Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 387Tires ......................................................... 388Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 388Finish Damage .......................................... 388Underbody Maintenance ............................ 388Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 389Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 389

Vehicle Identification .................................. 390Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 390Service Parts Identification Label ............... 391

Electrical System ........................................ 391Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 391Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 392Power Windows and Other Power

Options .................................................. 392Fuses ........................................................ 392Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 393Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 396Rear Compartment Fuse Block .................. 398

Capacities and Specifications .................... 401

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

296

ServiceYour Saturn retailer knows your vehicle best andwants you to be happy with it. We hope youwill go to your retailer for all your service needs.You will get genuine Saturn parts andSaturn-trained and supported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your Saturn vehicleall Saturn.

Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-Saturn accessories to yourvehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performanceand safety, including such things as, airbags,braking, stability, ride and handling, emissionssystems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronicsystems like anti-lock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some of these accessoriesmay even cause malfunction or damage notcovered by warranty.

Saturn accessories are designed to complementand function with other systems on yourvehicle. Your Saturn retailer can accessorize yourvehicle using genuine Saturn accessories.When you go to your Saturn retailer and ask forSaturn accessories, you will know thatSaturn-trained and supported service technicianswill perform the work using genuine Saturnaccessories.

297

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.



• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English andmetric fasteners can be easilyconfused. If you use the wrongfasteners, parts can later break orfall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you should use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 435.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 86.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 418.

298

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your retailer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle.To help keep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, Saturn recommendsthe use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.

The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) shows the code letter or number thatidentifies your vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at thetop left of the instrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) on page 390.

Gasoline OctaneIf your vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine (VINCode N), use regular unleaded gasoline with aposted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octanerating is less than 87, you might notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive, commonly referredto as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, the engineneeds service.

If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VINCode 7), use regular unleaded gasoline with aposted octane rating of 87 or higher. For bestperformance or trailer towing, you could choose touse middle grade 89 octane unleaded gasoline.If the octane rating is less than 87, you mightnotice an audible knocking noise when you drive,commonly referred to as spark knock. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higheras soon as possible. If you are using gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavyknocking, the engine needs service.

299

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). Saturn recommends against the useof gasolines containing MMT. See Additives onpage 300 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. See theunderhood emission control label. If this fuel is notavailable in states adopting California emissionsstandards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily onfuels meeting federal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on and yourvehicle may fail a smog-check test. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 199. If this occurs, return toyour authorized Saturn retailer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by thetype of fuel used, repairs may not be covered byyour warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meetU.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valvesclean, or if your vehicle experiences problems dueto dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline thatis advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.Also, your retailer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such asethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolinesmay be available in your area. We recommend thatyou use these gasolines if they comply with thespecifications described earlier. However,E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containingmore than 10% ethanol must not be usedin vehicles that were not designed for those fuels.

300

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and also damageplastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldnot be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.We recommend against the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life ofspark plugs and the performance of the emissioncontrol system may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on. If this occurs, return toyour retailer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel mightbe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

301

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not usecellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattended whenrefueling your vehicle. This is against thelaw in some places. Do not re-enter thevehicle while pumping fuel. Keep childrenaway from the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

302

To open the fuel door, apply pressure in thecenter of the rear edge of the fuel door and it willpop open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it;if the cap is released too soon, it will springback to the right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.

{CAUTION:

Fuel can spray out on you if you open thefuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel andthen something ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon aspossible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 385.

303

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right(clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fullyinstalled. The diagnostic system can determineif the fuel cap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. This would allow fuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 199.

If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center(DIC), the CHECK GAS CAP message will bedisplayed if the fuel cap is not properly installed.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow offuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer/ retailer canget one for you. If you get the wrong type, itmay not fit properly. This may cause yourmalfunction indicator lamp to light and maydamage your fuel tank and emissions system.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 199.

304

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.



• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumpinggasoline.

• Do not use a cellular phone whilepumping gasoline.

305

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hoodrelease handle withthis symbol on it.It is locatedinside the vehicle tothe left of thesteering column.

306

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pushthe secondary hood release handle towardthe driver side of the vehicle.

3. Lift the hood.

4. After the hood is slightly lifted, it will continueto open to the full position. Before closing thehood, be sure all the filler caps are onproperly. Lower the hood until the lifting forceof the strut is reduced, then release thehood to latch fully. Check to make sure thehood is closed and repeat the process ifnecessary.

307

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 3.5L V6 engine, this is what you see:

308

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 317.

B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 332.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 312.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 312.

E. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See EngineCoolant on page 322.

F. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 325.G. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake

Fluid” under Brakes on page 335.H. Battery. See Battery on page 338.I. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine

Compartment Fuse Block on page 396.J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See

“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 334.

309

When you open the hood on the 3.6L V6 engine, this is what you see:

310

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 317.

B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 332.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 312.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 312.

E. Electric Engine Cooling Fans (Out of View).See Cooling System on page 328.

F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See EngineCoolant on page 322.

G. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 325.

H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 335.

I. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See“Checking the Fluid Level” under AutomaticTransaxle Fluid (3.5L V6 Engine) on page 319or Automatic Transaxle Fluid (3.6L V6Engine) on page 319.

J. Battery. See Battery on page 338.K. Underhood Fuse Block. See Engine

Compartment Fuse Block on page 396.L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See

“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 334.

311

Engine OilIf your vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine and theLOW OIL LEVEL message appears on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), check the engine oillevel right away. For more information, see LOWOIL LEVEL under DIC Warnings and Messageson page 206.

You should check the engine oil level regularly;the LOW OIL LEVEL message in vehicles with the3.5L V6 engine is an added reminder.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 308for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

312

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tipof the dipstick, you need to add at least one quart/liter of oil. But you must use the right kind.

This section explains what kind of oil to use. Forengine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 401.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe upper mark that shows the properoperating range, the engine could be damaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 308 for thelocation of the engineoil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range.Push the dipstick all the way back in whenyou are through.

3.5L Engine

3.6L Engine

313

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for three things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. Look for and use onlyan oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

• Oils meeting theserequirements shouldhave the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. Thissymbol indicates thatthe oil has beencertified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Look for this information on the oil container, anduse only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and have the starburstsymbol on the front of the oil container.

314

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provideeasier cold starting and better protection forthe engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you need for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message willcome on. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 206. Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions, theoil life system might not indicate that an oil changeis necessary for over a year. However, the engineoil and filter must be changed at least once a yearand at this time the system must be reset. Yourdealer/retailer has trained service people who willperform this work using genuine parts and reset thesystem. It is also important to check the oil regularlyand keep it at the proper level.

315

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) sinceyour last oil change. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife SystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange the engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Whenever the oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange the oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOONmessage being turned on, reset the system.

After changing the engine oil and filter, the systemmust be reset. To reset the oil life system:

1. With the CHANGE OIL SOON messagedisplayed, press either of the DIC buttonsto clear the CHANGE OIL SOON message.See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 206.

2. Display OIL LIFE RESET on the DIC.

3. Press and hold the ENTER button for at leastone second. An ACKNOWLEDGED displaymessage will appear for three seconds or untilthe next button is pressed. This will tell youthe system has been reset. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 211.

4. Turn the ignition to OFF.

If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes backon when you start your vehicle, the engine oillife system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that canbe unhealthy for your skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for verylong. Clean your skin and nails with soap andwater, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properlydispose of clothing or rags containing used engineoil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the useand disposal of oil products.

316

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oilby putting it in the trash, pouring it on theground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil. If you have a problemproperly disposing of used oil, ask yourdealer/retailer, a service station, or a localrecycling center for help.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overview on page 308for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 406 for moreinformation. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engineoil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,do the following:

1. Remove the spring clamps that hold thecover on.

2. Lift off the cover.

317

3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

4. Align the filter correctly using alignment tab.

5. Install cover by guiding the tabs on the rim ofthe top cover into the bottom hinges and turnthe cover down to close it.

6. The spring clips will engage easily, if thecover is properly seated.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter inplace when you are driving.

318

Automatic Transaxle Fluid(3.5L V6 Engine)It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluidlevel. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason forfluid loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle tothe dealer/retailer service department and have itrepaired as soon as possible.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 408, andbe sure to use the transaxle fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 415.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 415.

Automatic Transaxle Fluid(3.6L V6 Engine)

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransaxle FluidA good time to check the automatic transaxle fluidlevel is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid at the intervals listed in AdditionalRequired Services on page 408, and be sure touse the transaxle fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 415.

How to Check AutomaticTransaxle FluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealer/retailerservice department.

319

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damagethe transaxle. Too much can mean that some ofthe fluid could come out and fall on hot engineor exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Toolittle fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat.Be sure to get an accurate reading if you checkthe transaxle fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransaxle fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be atnormal operating temperature, which is 180°F to200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to drive longer.

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear, pausing forabout three seconds in each one. Then,position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three tofive minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, followthese steps:

The transaxle fluiddipstick handle hasthis symbol on it, andis located near the frontof the enginecompartment.

320

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 308for more information on location.

1. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a cleanrag or paper towel.

2. Reinstall it back in all the way, waitthree seconds and then pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. The fluid level must be within thecross hatched area.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,reinstall the dipstick back in all the way.

How to Add Automatic Transaxle FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transaxle fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 415.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level into the crosshatched area on the dipstick.

1. Remove the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid atthe dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally lessthan a half pint (0.24 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 415.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained,reinstall the dipstick back in all the way.

321

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 325.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work asthey should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core, orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, at thefirst maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

322

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear, have your dealer/retailer check yourcooling system.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system,you could damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listedin this manual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 415 for more information.

323

Checking Coolant

The engine coolant surge tank is located in therear of the engine compartment.


{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level should be atthe FULL COLD mark or slightly higher.

324

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,but only when the engine is cool. If the surge tankis empty, a special fill procedure is necessary.See Engine Overheating on page 325 and CoolingSystem on page 328.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight and fully seated.

Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.


Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingYou will find an engine coolant temperature gageas well as an engine coolant temperaturewarning light on your vehicle’s instrument panelcluster. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gageon page 198 and Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light on page 198.

325

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Turn itoff and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when the vehiclesengine is overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the engineis cool.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 327 forinformation on driving to a safe place inan emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.See Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode on page 327 for information on driving toa safe place in an emergency.

If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineAn overheat warning, can indicate aserious problem.

If you get an engine overheat warning, but see orhear no steam, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little toohot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

326

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safeto do so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highestfan speed and open the windows asnecessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does not comeback on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and parkyour vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine forthree minutes while you are parked. If you stillhave the warning, turn off the engine andget everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down.

You might decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating mode allows yourvehicle to be driven to a safe place in anemergency situation. If an overheated enginecondition exists, an overheat protection modewhich alternates firing groups of cylinders helpsprevent engine damage. In this mode, youwill notice a significant loss in power and engineperformance. The temperature gage willindicate an overheat condition exists. Drivingextended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil will beseverely degraded. Repair the cause of coolantloss, change the oil and reset the oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil on page 312.

327

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans (Out of View)B. Engine Coolant Surge TankC. Pressure Cap

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

The coolant level should be at or above theFULL COLD mark on the front of the coolant surgetank. If it is not, you may have a leak at thepressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heaterhoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere elsein the cooling system.

3.5L V6 Engine shown, 3.6L V6 Engine similar

328

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fansare running. If the engine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not, your vehicleneeds service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered byyour warranty.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core, orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant inyour vehicle.

329

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedurecould cause your engine to overheat andbe severely damaged.

If you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolantis visible but the coolant level is not at or abovethe FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixtureof clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolantat the coolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system, including the coolant surge tankpressure cap, is cool before you do it. See EngineCoolant on page 322 for more information.

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, addcoolant as follows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

330

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. You can remove thecoolant surge tankpressure capwhen the coolingsystem, includingthe coolantsurge tank pressurecap and upperradiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseabout two or two and one-half turns. If youhear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will allowany pressure still left to be vented out thedischarge hose.

331

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with theproper mixture, to the FULL COLD mark onthe front of the surge tank. Wait aboutfive minutes, then check to see if the level isbelow the FULL COLD mark. If the levelis below the FULL COLD mark, add additionalcoolant to bring the level up to the mark.Repeat this procedure until the level remainsconstant at the FULL COLD mark for atleast five minutes.

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the engine cooling fans.By this time, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may be lower. If the levelis lower than the FULL COLD mark, addmore of the proper mixture to the coolantsurge tank until the level reaches the FULLCOLD mark.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

See your dealer/retailer, if necessary.

Power Steering FluidSee EngineCompartment Overviewon page 308 forreservoir location.

332

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless a leak is suspected in thesystem, or an unusual noise is heard. A fluid lossin this system could indicate a problem. Havethe system inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick

If your vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine, the fluidlevel should be between the ADD and HOT markswhen the engine is cold, and at the HOT markwhen the engine is hot. If the fluid is at the ADDmark when the engine is cold or hot, powersteering fluid should be added.

If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine, the fluidlevel should be between the MIN (Minimum) andMAX (Maximum) marks when the engine is cold.and at the MAX mark when the engine is hot. If thefluid is at the MIN mark when the engine is cold orhot, power steering fluid should be added.

The fluid level should be within the crosshatcharea on the dipstick.

If the fluid is at or below the ADD mark on thedipstick, add just enough fluid to bring thelevel within the crosshatch area.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 415.Always use the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damageyour vehicle and the damages may not becovered by your warranty. Always usethe correct fluid listed in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 415.

333

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer FluidWhen the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low,a LOW WASHER FLUID message displays onthe Driver Information Center (DIC). See DICWarnings and Messages on page 206 for moreinformation.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 308for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for fluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if it iscompletely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damagethe vehicle’s windshield washer systemand paint.

334

Brakes

Brake FluidThe brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 308 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have thebrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later the brakes will not work well.

So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when the linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid, asnecessary, only when work is done on thebrake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, itcan spill on the engine. The fluid will burn ifthe engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle could bedamaged. Add brake fluid only when workis done on the brake hydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, theBRAKE FLUID message in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) displays. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 206.

335

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 415.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well.This could cause a crash. Always use theproper brake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 385.

336

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates can cause abrake squeal when the brakes are first appliedor lightly applied. This does not mean somethingis wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities and Specifications onpage 401.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal doesnot return to normal height, or if there is arapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might be required.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or withoutthe vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.

337

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and testedwith top-quality brake parts. When you replaceparts of the braking system — for example, whenthe brake linings wear down and you neednew ones put in — be sure you get new approvedreplacement parts. If you do not, the brakesmight not work properly. For example, if someoneputs in brake linings that are wrong for yourvehicle, the balance between the front and rearbrakes can change — for the worse. The brakingperformance you have come to expect canchange in many other ways if someone puts in thewrong replacement brake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, see yourdealer/retailer for one that has the replacementnumber shown on the original battery’s label. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 308for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keep thebattery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 339 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

338

Jump StartingIf your battery has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumper cables to startyour vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode

or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transaxle in PARK (P) ora manual transaxle in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake.

339

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that arenot needed. This will avoid sparks and helpsave both batteries. And it could savethe radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries.Find the positive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on each vehicle. Yourvehicle’s positive (+) terminal is located undera red tethered cap on the battery.

The negative (–) terminal is located under ablack tethered cap on the battery. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 308 formore information on location. Flip the caps upto access the positive (+) and negative (–)terminals.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

340

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle. Butif a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdon’t, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somethings you should know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damagethe battery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

341

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes toa heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to aremote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cableat least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the deadbattery, but not near engine parts that move.The electrical connection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries,it probably needs service.

342

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (–) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (–) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the caps over the positive (+) andnegative (–) terminals to their originalpositions.

Jumper Cable Removal

343

Bulb ReplacementFor the type of bulb to use, see ReplacementBulbs on page 346.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps

A. Turn Signal LampB. Stoplamp/Taillamp

C. Backup LampD. Sidemarker Lamp

If a stoplamp or a taillamp needs to be replaced,see your dealer/retailer.

344

To replace a sidemarker lamp, turn signal lamp, ora back-up lamp:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 106 formore information.

2. Remove the convenience net, if the vehiclehas one.

3. Remove the wing nuts holding the trunk trim.

4. Remove the three wing nuts, which hold thetaillamp assembly, from inside the vehicle.

5. Remove the taillamp assembly.

6. Remove the wiring harness from the taillampassembly by lifting the release tab.

7. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove it.

8. Pull the bulb from the socket.

9. Install a new bulb.

10. Reverse Steps 2 through 6 to reinstall thetaillamp assembly.

345

License Plate LampTo replace the license plate lamp bulb:

1. Remove the two screws holding the licenseplate lamp assembly to the fascia.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forwardthrough the fascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thelamp assembly.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-up Lamp 921

License Plate Lamp and RearSidemarker Lamp 168

Turn Signal Lamp 3156

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer/retailer.

346

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 406 for more information on wiper bladeinspection.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. Here is how toremove the wiper blade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector awayfrom the windshield.

2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side ofthe blade, and turn the blade assembly awayfrom the arm connector.

3. Install the new blade onto the arm connectorand make sure the grooved areas are fully setin the locked position.

For the proper type and size, see NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 416.

347

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your Saturn Warrantybooklet for details. For additional information referto the tire manufacturer’s booklet included withyour vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 279.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 356.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or ifyour vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

348

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact sparetire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

349

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and numberof plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required to gradetires based on three performance factors:treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.For more information see Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 366.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.If your vehicle has a compact spare tire,see Compact Spare Tire on page 381 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 369.

Compact Spare Tire Example

350

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and numberof plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 356.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service description.The letter T as the first character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

351

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system.The letter P as the first character in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicle tire engineeredto standards set by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, asshown in item C of the illustration, it would meanthat the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high asit is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheelin inches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

352

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission,power steering, power brakes, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure ina tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 356.

Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle withstandard and optional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 279.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 279.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 279.

353

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number rangingfrom 1 to 279 that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximumair pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 279.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 356 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 279.

354

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plycords that extend to the beads are laid at 90degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tires onpage 363.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 366.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 279.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 279.

355

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to your vehicle. This label showsyour vehicle’s original equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to supportyour vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 279. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 381.

356

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemYour vehicle has a Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS). This system uses radio andsensor technology to check tire pressure levels.Sensors are mounted onto each tire andwheel assembly, except for the spare tire.The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure inyour vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressurereadings to a receiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), shouldbe checked monthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires ofa different size than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

357

As an added safetyfeature, your vehiclehas been equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoring system(TPMS) thatilluminates a low tirepressure telltalewhen one or moreof your tires issignificantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, evenif under-inflation has not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when the system isnot operating properly. The TPMS malfunctionindicator is combined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects a malfunction, thetelltale will flash for approximately one minute andthen remain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will continue upon subsequent vehiclestart-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

When a low tire pressure condition is detected,the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warningsymbol on the instrument panel cluster, and atthe same time the CHECK TIRE PRESS messageappears on the Driver Information Center (DIC)display.

358

The low tire pressure warning symbol on theinstrument panel cluster, and the CHECK TIREPRESS message appear at each ignitioncycle until the tires are inflated to the correctinflation pressure. For additional information anddetails about the DIC operation and displayssee DIC Operation and Displays on page 205 andDIC Warnings and Messages on page 206.

The tire pressure warning light may come on incool weather when the vehicle is first started, andthen turn off as you start to drive. This couldbe an early indicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Information label, attached toyour vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and the correct inflationpressure for your vehicle’s tires when theyare cold. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 279,for an example of the tire information label andits location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - TirePressure on page 356.

Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about alow tire pressure condition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 362 and Tires on page 348.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehiclehas Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid sealantcan damage the tire pressure monitor sensors.

The TPMS will not function properly if one or moreof the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable.See your Saturn retailer for service if all TPMSsensors are installed and the error messagecomes on and stays on.

TPMS Sensor Identification CodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you replace one or more ofthe TPMS sensors or rotate the vehicle’s tires, theidentification codes need to be matched to thenew tire/wheel position. The sensors are matched,to the tire/wheel positions, in the following order:driver side front tire, passenger side front tire,passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tireusing a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your Saturnretailer for service.

The TPMS sensors may also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasingthe tire’s air pressure. When increasing the tire’spressure, do not exceed the maximum inflationpressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.

359

You have two minutes to match each tire and wheelposition. If it takes longer than two minutes to matchany tire and wheel position, the matching processstops and you need to start over.

The TPMS matching process is outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON with theengine off.

3. Press and hold both the Lock and Unlockbuttons on the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter, at the same time, forapproximately five seconds or until you hearthe horn sound twice.

4. The horn sounds twice to indicate the TPMSreceiver is ready to learn TPMS sensors.The driver side front turn signal also comeson to indicate that corner’s sensor is ready tobe learned.

5. Start with the driver side front tire.

6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valvestem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasingor decreasing the tire’s air pressure for abouteight seconds. The horn chirp, which may takeup to 30 seconds to sound, sounds one timeand all the turn signals flash one time toconfirm that the sensor identification code hasbeen matched to the tire/wheel position. Todecrease the tire’s air-pressure use the pointedend of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressuregage, or a key.

7. The passenger side front turn signal comeson to indicate that corner’s sensor is ready tobe learned. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6.

8. The passenger side rear turn signal comes onto indicate that corner’s sensor is ready to belearned. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6.

360

9. The driver side rear turn signal comes on toindicate that corner’s sensor is ready to belearned. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedure in Step 6.

10. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driverside rear tire, two additional horn chirps soundto indicate the tire learning process is done.Turn the ignition switch to OFF.

11. Set all four tires to the recommended airpressure level as indicated on the tire andloading information label.

12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and ScienceCanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry and Science Canada.


1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industryand Science Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:




361

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 363and Wheel Replacement on page 367 formore information.The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 406.

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in yourtire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 401.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 370.

362

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less oftread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing throughthe tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, orsnagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damagethat cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tiresfor your vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

363

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by an MSfor mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 349 for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damage



to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle.See Compact Spare Tire on page 381.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

364

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed onthe Tire and Loading Information label. Thislabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 279,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,and stability control, the performance of thesesystems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use Saturn specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by aSaturn certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 363 andAccessories and Modifications on page 297 foradditional information.

365

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

366

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your retailer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsshould be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replaceit (except some aluminum wheels, which cansometimes be repaired). See your dealer/retailer ifany of these conditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheelyou need.

367

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew Saturn original equipment parts. This way,you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision inwhich you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 370 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use a newSaturn original equipment wheel.

368

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is not enoughclearance. Tire chains used on a vehiclewithout the proper amount of clearancecan cause damage to the brakes,suspension or other vehicle parts. The areadamaged by the tire chains could causeyou to lose control of your vehicle and youor others may be injured in a crash.

Use another type of traction device only ifits manufacturer recommends it for use onyour vehicle and tire size combination androad conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer’s instructions. To help avoiddamage to your vehicle, drive slowly,readjust or remove the device if it iscontacting your vehicle, and do not spinyour vehicle’s wheels. If you do findtraction devices that will fit, install them onthe front tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steeringwheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position,and then gently brake to a stop well out of thetraffic lane.

369

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use thejacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. SeeHazard Warning Flashers on page 162 for moreinformation.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).


370


3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire, on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information tells you how to use thejack and change a tire.

371

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you will need is located in the trunk.1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 106 for

more information.2. Lift the handle on the spare tire cover. The

handle can hook on the front edge of thetrunk’s weatherstrip to hold the cover out ofthe way.

3. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise andremove it. Then remove the compactspare tire. See Compact Spare Tire onpage 381 for more information.

4. Remove the wing nut holding the jackin place.

5. Remove the extension bolt that is clippedto the jack. You need this later to store theflat tire.

6. Remove the jack and wheel wrench fromthe trunk.

The tools you will be using include the wheelwrench (A) and jack (B).

372

1. Turn the plastic wing nut counterclockwise toloosen the wheel wrench.

2. Unhook the wheel wrench from the jack.

3. Extend the handle on the wheel wrench bypressing the button with your index fingerand pulling on the end of the wrench.You must do this before using the wheelwrench.

373

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire1. Do a safety check before proceeding. Please

see Changing a Flat Tire on page 370 formore information.

2. If your vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcapthat has plastic wheel nut caps, then loosenthe plastic nut caps. You might need touse the wheel wrench to loosen them. Do notpry off wheel covers or center caps thathave plastic wheel nut caps.

3. Remove the wheel cover or center cap fromthe wheel to locate the wheel nuts.If your vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcapwithout plastic wheel nut caps, carefully pry onthe edge of the plastic wheel trim to removeit from the wheel to find the wheel nuts.Store the wheel cover in the trunk until youhave the flat repaired or replaced.

4. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheelnuts. Do not remove them yet.

374

5. Position the lift head at the jack locationnearest the flat tire. Make sure all of thejack lift head is touching the jacking flangeunder the body. Do not place the jack under abody panel. The lower body panel has anarrow to aid in locating the jacking location.

6. Put the compact spare tire near the flat tire.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raisingthe vehicle.

375

7. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrenchclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enough room forthe compact spare tire to fit underneath thewheel well.

8. Remove all of thewheel nuts.

9. Remove the flat tire.

376

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time.The wheel could come off and cause anaccident. When changing a wheel, removeany rust or dirt from the places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, a cloth or a paper towel canbe used to do this; but be sure to use ascraper or wire brush later, if needed, toget all the rust or dirt off.

10. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces, andspare wheel.

11. Install the compact spare tire.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.Because the nuts might come loose.The vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causinga serious accident.

12. Put the wheel nuts back on with the roundedend of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighteneach nut by hand until the wheel is heldagainst the hub.

377

13. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheelwrench counterclockwise. Lower the jackcompletely.

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench tothe proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 401for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 401 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

378

14. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequence,as shown, withthe wheel wrench.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourvehicle’s compact spare. If you try to put awheel cover on the compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

To store the flat tire and jack in the compact sparetire compartment:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 106 formore information.

2. Remove the bolt extension (in the yellowsleeve) from the jack and remove thecenter cap from the wheel.

379

3. Place the jack over the bolt (A) on the floor,making sure it contacts the bolt as shown,and thread the jack retainer nut until itcontacts the jack.

4. With the valve stem up, place the tire on thecompartment floor with the rear of the tirebeneath the trim panel (tire may not laycompletely flat).

5. Line up the center hole of the wheel withthe bolt.

6. With the yellow cap in place to prevent thewheel from being scratched, screw the boltextension onto the bolt through the wheelnut hole.

7. Remove the yellow cap from the bolt extension.

8. Secure the tire and wheel with the largerwing nut.

A. CoverB. RetainerC. Spare TireD. Wing NutE. Bracket

F. Jack, WheelWrench, and BoltExtension

G. Bolt

380

The compact spare is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tireas soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tireon page 381. See the storage instructions label toreplace your compact spare into your trunkproperly.

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air aftera time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,stop as soon as possible and make sure thespare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spareis made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles(5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and havethe full-size tire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best to replace thespare with a full-size tire as soon as possible.The spare tire will last longer and be in goodshape in case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

381

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces for which

they were not intended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the rear window defogger. When cleaningthe glass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that maybecome concentrated in your vehicle’s breathingspace. Before using cleaners, read and adhereto all safety instructions on the label. Whilecleaning your vehicle’s interior, maintainadequate ventilation by opening your vehicle’sdoors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your retailer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your retailer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

382

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with apaper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possibleand then vacuum.

383

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

384

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 415.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strongsoaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse thevehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.You can get approved cleaning products from yourretailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials onpage 389. Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives.All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly andnot allowed to dry on the surface, or they couldstain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or anall-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches andwater spotting.High pressure car washes may cause water toenter your vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 385.

385

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of yourvehicle by hand may be necessary to removeresidue from the paint finish. You can get approvedcleaning products from your Saturn retailer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 389.

Your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish. The clearcoat gives more depth and glossto the colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrialchimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish ifthey remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicleas soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe for painted surfacesto remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take their tollover a period of years. You can help to keep thepaint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.

Windshield and Wiper BladesClean the outside of the windshield withglass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth orpaper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid ora mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughlywhen cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime,sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatmentsmay cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiperblades if they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without proper removal

386

Aluminum Wheels

Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trimmay be damaged if you do not wash yourvehicle after driving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium, calcium or sodiumchloride. These chlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust. Alwayswash your vehicle’s chrome with soap andwater after exposure.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminumor chrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

387

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush withtire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repairshop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your Saturnretailer. Larger areas of finish damage canbe corrected in your Saturn retailer’s body andpaint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials fromthe underbody with plain water. Clean anyareas where mud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frame shouldbe loosened before being flushed. Your Saturnretailer or an underbody car washing system cando this for you.

388

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on yourvehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, wewill repair, at no charge to the owner, thesurfaces of new vehicles damaged by this falloutcondition within 12 months or 12,000 miles(20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke, and fingerprints.

Chrome and Wire WheelCleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

389

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one easy step.No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl, andcloth upholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather, and carpet.

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

390

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code helps you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is on the inside of the glove box.It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.The label has the following information:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your retailerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 86.

391

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by aninternal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motoroverheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper willstop until the motor cools. If the overload iscaused by some electrical problem, have it fixed.

Power Windows and OtherPower OptionsFuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opensprotecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.

FusesThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fuses,circuit breakers and fusible links. This greatlyreduces the chance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. Ifthe band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure to replace a bad fuse with a new one ofthe identical size and rating.

There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: one inthe center of the instrument panel, one in theengine compartment and one in the trunk.

There is a fuse puller located on the instrumentpanel fuse block. It can be used to easily removefuses from the fuse block.

392

Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block is located on thepassenger’s side of the vehicle, on the lowerportion of the instrument panel near the floor.

Remove the panel cover to access the fuseblock, then remove the fuse block cover to accessthe fuses.

393

Your vehicle might not have all the fuses and features listed.

394

Fuses UsagePOWERMIRRORS Power Mirrors

NOTINSTALLED Not Used

RUN/CRANK Cruise Control Switch, PassengerAirbag Status Indicator

HVACBLOWER HIGH

Heating Ventilation Air ConditioningBlower - High Speed Relay

CLUSTER/THEFT

Instrument Panel Cluster, TheftDeterrent System

ONSTAR OnStar®


AIRBAG (IGN) Airbag (Ignition)

HVAC CTRL(BATT)

Heating Ventilation Air ConditioningControl Diagnostic Link Connector(Battery)

PEDAL Adjustable PedalsWIPER SW Windshield Wiper/Washer SwitchIGN SENSOR Ignition SwitchSTRG WHLILLUM Steering Wheel Illumination


RADIO Audio SystemINTERIORLIGHTS Interior Lamps

Fuses UsageREAR WIPER Not UsedPOWERWINDOWS Power Windows

HVAC CTRL(IGN)

Heating Ventilation Air ConditioningControl (Ignition)

HVACBLOWER

Heating Ventilation Air ConditioningBlower Switch

DOOR LOCK Door LocksROOF/HEATSEAT Sunroof, Power Windows



AIRBAG(BATT) Airbag (Battery)

SPARE FUSEHOLDER Spare Fuse Holder




FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller

395

Engine Compartment Fuse BlockYour vehicle may not be equipped with all the fuses and features listed. The engine compartment fuseblock is located on the driver’s side of the engine compartment, near the battery.

396

Fuses Usage1 Air Conditioner Clutch2 Electronic Throttle Control3 Engine Control Module IGN 1 (LZ4)

4 Transmission Control ModuleIgnition 1

5 Mass Airflow Sensor (LY7)6 Emission7 Left Headlamp Low-Beam8 Horn9 Right Headlamp Low-Beam

10 Front Fog Lamps11 Left Headlamp High-Beam12 Right Headlamp High-Beam13 Engine Control Module BATT (LY7)14 Windshield Wiper15 Anti-lock Brake System (IGN 1)16 Engine Control Module IGN 1 (LY7)17 Cooling Fan 118 Cooling Fan 2

19 Run Relay, Heating, Ventilation, AirConditioning Blower

Fuses Usage20 Body Control Module 121 Body Control Module Run/Crank22 Rear Electrical Center 123 Rear Electrical Center 224 Anti-lock Brake System25 Body Control Module 226 Starter41 Not Used

42 Transmission Control ModuleBattery

43 Ignition Module (LZ4); Injectors,Ignition Coils Odd (LY7)

44 Injectors (LZ4); Injectors, IgnitionCoils Even (LY7)

45 Post Cat 02 Sensor Heaters46 Daytime Running Lamps47 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp50 Driver Power Window51 Engine Control Module BATT (LZ4)

397

Relays Usage28 Cooling Fan 129 Cooling Fan Series/Parallel30 Cooling Fan 231 Starter32 Run/Crank, Ignition33 Powertrain34 Air Conditioning Clutch35 High Beam36 Front Fog Lamps37 Horn38 Low-Beam Headlamp39 Windshield Wiper 140 Windshield Wiper 248 Daytime Running Lamps49 Stoplamps

Diodes Usage27 Wiper

Rear Compartment Fuse Block

The rear compartment fuse block is located in thetrunk of the vehicle. Access the fuse blockthrough the trunk panel on the driver’s side of therear cargo area.

398

Fuses Usage1 Passenger Seat Controls2 Driver Seat Controls3 Not Used4 Not Used

Fuses Usage5 Belt Alternator Starter (BAS)

6 Park Lamps, Instrument PanelDimming

7 Not Used

399

Fuses Usage8 Not Used9 Not Used

10 Sunroof Controls11 Not Used12 Not Used13 Audio Amplifier14 Heated Seat Controls15 Not Used

16 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System, XM™ Satellite Radio

17 Back-up Lamps18 Not Used19 Not Used20 Auxiliary Power Outlets21 Not Used22 Trunk Release23 Rear Defog24 Heated Mirrors25 Fuel Pump

Relays Usage26 Rear Window Defogger27 Park Lamps28 Not Used29 Not Used30 Not Used31 Not Used32 Not Used33 Back-up Lamps34 Not Used35 Not Used36 Trunk Release37 Fuel Pump

38 (Diode) Cargo Lamp

400

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer toRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 415 for more information.

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your retailer for moreinformation.

Automatic Transaxle (Bottom Pan Removal)

Automatic Transaxle – 4 Speed 7.0 qt 6.6 L

Automatic Transaxle – 6 Speed 9.5 qt 9.0 L

Cooling System

3.5L V6 Engine and 3.6L V6 Engine 9.7 qt 9.2 L

Engine Oil with Filter

3.5L V6 Engine 4.0 qt 3.8 L

3.6L V6 Engine 5.5 qt 5.2 L

Fuel Tank 16.3 gal 61.7 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended inthis manual.

401

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

3.5L V6 N Automatic 0.040 inches (1.0 mm)

3.6L V6 7 Automatic 0.044 inches (1.1 mm)

402

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 404Introduction ............................................... 404Maintenance Requirements ........................ 404Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 404Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 404Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 406Additional Required Services ..................... 408Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 409

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 411At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 412At Least Once a Month ............................. 412At Least Once a Year ............................... 413Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 415Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 416Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 417Maintenance Record .................................. 418

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

403

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Maintenance RequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary to keepyour vehicle in good working condition. Anydamage caused by failure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not be covered by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at Saturn want to help you keep your vehiclein good working condition. But we do not knowexactly how you will drive it. You may drivevery short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the timein very hot, dusty weather. You may use yourvehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements.So please read the following and note howyou drive. If you have any questions on how tokeep your vehicle in good condition, see yourSaturn retailer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:• carry passengers and cargo within

recommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 279.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 299.

404

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 406 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 408 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 409 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job.If you have any doubt, see your retailer tohave a qualified technician do the work.See Doing Your Own Service Work onpage 298.

Some maintenance services can be complex.So, unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should haveyour Saturn retailer do these jobs.

When you go to your Saturn retailer for yourservice needs, you will know that Saturn-trainedand supported service technicians will perform thework using genuine Saturn parts.

If you want to purchase service information,see Service Publications Ordering Information onpage 435.

Owner Checks and Services on page 411 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehiclein good condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 415 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 416.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine Saturn parts.

405

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE OIL SOON message in theDriver Information Center (DIC) comes on, itmeans that service is required for your vehicle.Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions,the engine oil life system may not indicate thatvehicle service is necessary for over a year.However, the engine oil and filter must be changedat least once a year and at this time the systemmust be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trainedservice technicians who will perform this workusing genuine parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 315 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,certain services, checks, and inspections arerequired. Required services are described in thefollowing for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”Generally, it is recommended that your first servicebe Maintenance I, your second service beMaintenance II, and that you alternateMaintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II might berequired more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if themessage comes on within 10 months since thevehicle was purchased or Maintenance IIwas performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the messagecomes on 10 months or more since the lastservice or if the message has not come on at allfor one year.

406

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 312. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 315. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 317. See footnote (k). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 362 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month onpage 412.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”in this section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •3.6L Engine Only: Check automatic transmission fluid level and add fluidas needed. •

Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g). •

407

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage orleaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 317. • • •

3.5L (Code N) V6 Engine Only: Changeautomatic transmission fluid and filter(severe service only). See footnote (h).

• • •

3.6L (Code 7) V6 Engine Only: Changeautomatic transmission fluid (severeservice). See footnote (l).

• • •

3.6L (Code 7) V6 Engine Only: Changeautomatic transmission fluid (normalservice).

•

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plugwires. An Emission Control Service. •

408

Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (m).

•

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect other brake parts,including calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspect electric powersteering cables for proper hook-up, binding,cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect hydraulic powersteering lines and hoses for proper hook-up,binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace withgenuine parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, orcontamination. Clean the windshield andwiper blades, if contaminated. Replace wiperblades that are worn or damaged. See WindshieldWiper Blade Replacement on page 347 andWindshield and Wiper Blades on page 386 formore information.

409

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged safety belt system parts.If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.Also look for any opened or broken airbagcoverings, and have them repaired or replaced.The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hingesand latches, hood hinges and latches, and trunk lidhinges and latches. More frequent lubricationmay be required when exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(g) Check system for interference or bindingand for damaged or missing parts. Replace partsas needed. Replace any components thathave high effort or excessive wear. Do notlubricate accelerator or cruise control cables.

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filterif the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, the fluid and filter do not requirechanging.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system.This service can be complex; you should haveyour dealer/retailer perform this service.See Engine Coolant on page 322 for what to use.Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test thecooling system and pressure cap.

410

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected andrepaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluidif needed.

(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(l) Change automatic transmission fluid if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or moreof these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, the fluid does not require changing.

(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to help ensurethe safety, dependability, and emission controlperformance of your vehicle. Your Saturn retailercan assist you with these checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 415.

411

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oilif necessary. See Engine Oil on page 312 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check the engine oilregularly and keep it at the proper level.Failure to keep the engine oil at the properlevel can cause damage to the engine notcovered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary.See Engine Coolant on page 322 for furtherdetails.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in thewindshield washer fluid reservoir and addthe proper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckInspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure theyare inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forgetto check the spare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 356. Check to make sure thespare tire is stored securely. See Changing a FlatTire on page 370.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 362.

412

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake onpage 127.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately ifit starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear.The vehicle should start only in PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your Saturn retailerfor service.

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 127.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shift leverout of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shiftlever moves out of PARK (P), contact yourSaturn retailer for service.

413

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set,try to turn the ignition to OFF in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn to OFF only when theshift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out only in OFF.

Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transaxle inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

414

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour dealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 312.

EngineCoolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 322.

HydraulicBrake System

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Usage Fluid/LubricantHydraulic

PowerSteeringSystem

(if equipped)

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring Anchor,

andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood andDoor Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 109435474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

415

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourSaturn retailer.

Part Part Numbers ACDelco® PartNumbers

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22676970 A1627C

Engine Oil Filter

3.5L V6 Engine 89017342 PF61

3.6L V6 Engine 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs

3.5L V6 Engine 12591131 41-100

3.6L V6 Engine 12597464 41-990

Windshield Wiper Blades

Driver’s Side – 23.6 inches (60.0 cm) 15779416 —

Passenger’s Side – 21.0 inches (53.0 cm) 15779415 —

416

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.5L V6 Engine 3.6L V6 Engine

417

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed theservice, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements onpage 404. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 411 can be added on thefollowing record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

418

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



419

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



420

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 422Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 422Online Owner Center ................................. 425Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 426Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 426GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 427Roadside Assistance Program ................... 427Collision Damage Repair ........................... 430

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 434Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 434

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian Government ............................ 434

Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn ............ 434Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 435Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ......... 436

Event Data Recorders ............................... 437OnStar ...................................................... 438Navigation System ..................................... 438Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ........ 438

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

421

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your retailer and to Saturn. Together we arecommitted to providing our customers withunparalleled service, before, during, and after thepurchase of a Saturn vehicle, for total customersatisfaction. We call this the Saturn Difference.Normally, any concerns with the sales transactionor the operation of your vehicle are resolved byyour retailer’s sales or service departments.If, for any reason, your ownership experience fallsbelow your expectations, we suggest you takethe following action:

STEP ONE: Contact the Retail CustomerAssistance Liaison. Any member of the retailmanagement team has the authority and the desireto resolve your concerns. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at this level.

STEP TWO: Should you need additionalassistance, in the U.S., contact the SaturnCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-553-6000. In Canada, contact theSaturn Customer Communication Centre at1-800-263-1999. A Saturn Customer AssistanceCenter team member will handle your call andassist in providing product and warrantyinformation, the nearest retailer location, roadsideassistance, brochures, literature and discussany concerns you may have.

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

This 17-digit number can be found on thevehicle registration or title, on the upper driverside corner of the dash, or on your roadsideassistance key card.

• The name of your selling and servicingretail facility.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.

422

When contacting Saturn, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn andits retailers are committed to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle.However, if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, Saturn and its retailers offer theadditional assistance of a neutral party throughour voluntary participation in a mediation/arbitrationprogram called Better Business Bureau (BBB)Auto Line.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. This programis available at no cost to you, our customer.

Although you may be required to resort to thisinformal dispute resolution program prior to filing acourt action, use of the program is free of chargeand your case is generally heard within 40 days.If you do not agree with the decision given in yourcase, you can reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief available to you.

Contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using thetoll-free telephone number or by writing themat the following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and other factors. SaturnCorporation reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.

423

STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):

General Motors Participation in theMediation/Arbitration ProgramIn the event that you do not feel your concernshave been addressed after following the procedureoutlined in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors ofCanada Limited has committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. Theprogram provides for the review of the factsinvolved by an impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearing before the arbiter.The program is designed so that the entiredispute settlement process, from the time you fileyour complaint to the final decision, should becompleted in approximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offers advantages overcourts in most jurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibility inthe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call the Saturn CustomerCommunication Centre, 1-800-263-1999, oryou may write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

424

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your Saturnownership needs. Specific vehicle information canbe found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members.

Refer to www.saturn.com on the web for updatedinformation and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

425

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist owners who have hearing difficulties,Saturn has installed special TDD(Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)equipment in its Saturn Customer AssistanceCenter.

Any hearing- or speech-impaired customer whohas access to a TDD or to a conventionalText Telephone (TTY) can communicate withSaturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. TTY usersin Canada may dial 1-800-263-3830.

Customer Assistance OfficesSaturn encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. If a customer wishes to writeto Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:

Saturn Customer Assistance Center100 Saturn ParkwayMail Code 371-999-S24

Spring Hill, TN 37174-15001-800-553-60001-800-833-6000(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000

In Canada, write to:

Saturn Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada Ltd.CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-19991-800-263-3830(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

426

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligibleaftermarket driver or passenger adaptiveequipment you may require for your vehicle suchas hand controls, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.The offer is available for a limited period of timefrom the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call theSaturn Customer Assistance Center at1-800-553-6000. Text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-6000.In Canada, customers may call the SaturnCustomer Communication Centre at1-800-263-1999. TTY users in Canada maycall 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance ProgramFor vehicles purchased in the U.S., call1-800-553-6000; (Text Telephone (TTY):1-800-833-6000).

For vehicles purchased in Canada, call1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Saturn RoadsideAssistance Program.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. In Canada,a person driving this vehicle without the consentof the owner is not eligible for coverage.

427

Services ProvidedThe following services are provided in theU.S. and Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles(160 000 km), whichever comes first, and,in Canada only, up to a maximum of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 Canada). In Canada, serviceto provide diesel may be restricted. For safetyreasons, propane and other alternative fuelsare not provided through this service.

• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service is coveredat no charge if you are unable to gain entry intoyour vehicle. A remote unlock may be availableif you have an active OnStar® subscription.To ensure security, the driver must presentpersonal identification before lock-out service isprovided. In Canada, the vehicle registration isalso required.

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest Saturn retailerfor warranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance is provided when the vehicle ismired in sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire ingood condition, when equipped and properlyinflated, is covered at no charge. The customeris responsible for the repair or replacement ofthe tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered atno charge if the vehicle does not start.

• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Uponrequest, Roadside Assistance will send youdetailed, computer personalized maps,highlighting your choice of either the mostdirect route or the most scenic route to yourdestination, anywhere in North America, alongwith helpful travel information pertaining toyour trip.Please allow three weeks before your planneddeparture date. Trip routing requests are limitedto six per calendar year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance(Canada only): In the event of a warrantyrelated vehicle disablement, while en route andover 250 kilometres from the original point ofdeparture, you might qualify for trip interruptionexpense assistance. This assistance covers

428

reasonable reimbursement of up to a maximumof $500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night),and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expense youmay incur while waiting for your vehicle to berepaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,and a copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim fortrip interruption expense assistance.

• Alternative Service (Canada only): Therecould be times when Roadside Assistancecannot provide timely assistance. Your advisormay authorize you to secure local emergencyroad service, and you will be reimbursed up to$100 upon submission of the original receipt toRoadside Assistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures may becovered. However, any cost for parts and labor fornon-warranty repairs are the responsibility ofthe driver.

Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their sole discretion,the claims become excessive in frequency or typeof occurrence.

Calling for AssistanceFor prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representatives:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number

• Telephone number of your location

• Location of the vehicle

• Model, year, color, and license plate numberof the vehicle

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) and delivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem

429

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Saturn and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue the Roadside Assistanceprogram at any time without notification.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and constructionmethods as the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GM part, may bean acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

430

Aftermarket collision parts are also available.These are made by companies other than GM andmay not have been tested for your vehicle. As aresult, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your Saturn retailermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair centerthat has GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing companymay require you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

431

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or the othervehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move it by apolice officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This helps guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call GMRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 427 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service is taking it. Get a cardfrom the tow truck operator or write down thedriver’s name, the service’s name, and thephone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle beforeit is towed away. Make sure this includes yourinsurance information and registration if youkeep these items in your vehicle.

• Gather the important information you need fromthe other driver. Things like name, address,phone number, driver’s license number, vehiclelicense plate, vehicle make, model and modelyear, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),insurance company and policy number, and ageneral description of the damage to the othervehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they need. If they askfor a police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and youcan get a copy of the report for a nominal fee.In some states/provinces with “no fault”insurance laws, a report may not be necessary.This is especially true if there are no injuriesand both vehicles are driveable.

432

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a Saturnretailer or a private collision repair facility to fixthe damage, make sure you are comfortablewith them. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repairfacility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have ittowed there. Specify to the facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts be original equipmentparts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember, recycled parts arenot covered by your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicleis leased you may be obligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts, even if yourinsurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accepta repair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have control of the repairand parts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

433

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it couldopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it couldorder a recall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your retailer or SaturnCorporation.To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors of Canada Limited. Call them at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects to SaturnIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, please notify Saturn.Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:

Saturn Corporation100 Saturn ParkwayMail Drop 371-999-S24Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999, or write:Saturn Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

434

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsA variety of publications are available to you.Saturn service manuals are written for trainedtechnicians, and in some cases, specialized toolsand equipment are necessary to completecertain repairs. However, the manuals areavailable to owners who either have the training,or wish to gain a greater understanding of thetechnical aspect of their Saturn.

For additional publications information or toorder publications in the United States,call toll free 1-800-2-SATURN or visitwww.saturn-publications.com to order on-line.

In Canada, Saturn service manuals are availableby calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.

Owner PublicationsInformation on how to obtain product bulletinsand as described below is applicable only in thefifty U.S. states and the District of Columbia,and only for cars and light trucks with a GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) less than10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copies of individualbulletins are also at your participating Saturnretailer. You can ask to see them.

In Canada, information relating to product servicebulletins can be obtained by contacting yourSaturn retailer.

435

Service BulletinsSaturn regularly sends its retailers useful servicebulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitorsproduct performance in the field. We then preparebulletins for servicing our products better.You can get these bulletins, too.

Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertainto the proper use and care of your vehicle.Some describe costly repairs. Others describeinexpensive repairs which, if done on time with thelatest parts, may avoid future costly repairs.

Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair anew or unexpected condition. Others describe aquicker way to fix your vehicle. They can helpa technician service your vehicle better.

Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a smallnumber of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer or aqualified technician may have to determine if aspecific bulletin applies to your vehicle. To orderSaturn bulletins, call Saturn Publications at1-800-2-SATURN or visitwww.saturn-publications.com to order online.

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyYour Saturn vehicle has a number of sophisticatedcomputers that record information about thevehicle’s performance and how it is driven.For example, your vehicle uses computer modulesto monitor and control engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor the conditions forairbag deployment and deploy airbags in a crashand, if so equipped, to provide anti-lock brakingto help the driver control the vehicle. Thesemodules may store data to help your dealer/retailertechnician service your vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how you operatethe vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules may alsoretain the owner’s personal preferences, such asradio pre-sets, seat positions, and temperaturesettings.

436

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data thatwill assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systemsperformed. The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics and safety systems fora short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record suchdata as:• How various systems in your vehicle were

operating• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety

belts were buckled/fastened• How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the

accelerator and/or brake pedal• How fast the vehicle was traveling

This data can help provide a better understandingof the circumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicleonly if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata is recorded by the EDR under normal drivingconditions and no personal data (e.g., name,

gender, age, and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such as law enforcement,could combine the EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinely acquiredduring a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the vehicleor the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such as lawenforcement, that have the special equipment,can read the information if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

Saturn will not access this data or share it withothers except: with the consent of the vehicleowner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consentof the lessee; in response to an official requestof police or similar government office; as partof Saturn’s defense of litigation through thediscovery process; or, as required by law.Data that Saturn collects or receives may alsobe used for Saturn research needs or maybe made available to others for research purposes,where a need is shown and the data is not tiedto a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

437

OnStarIf your vehicle has OnStar® and you subscribeto the OnStar® services, please refer to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions for informationon data collection and use. See also OnStar®

System on page 135 in this manual for moreinformation.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigation system,use of the system may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephone numbers,and other trip information. Please refer tothe navigation system operating manual forinformation on stored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio Frequency Identification(RFID)RFID technology is used in some vehicles forfunctions such as tire pressure monitoringand ignition system security, as well as inconnection with conveniences such as key fobsfor remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garage door openers.RFID technology in Saturn vehicles does notuse or record personal information or link withany other Saturn system containing personalinformation.

438

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 297Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 87Additives, Fuel ............................................ 300Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 391Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ............ 120Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 317Air Conditioning .................................. 177, 181Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 191Readiness Light ....................................... 190

Airbag System ............................................... 69What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 78When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 75Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 72

Airbag SystemsAdding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 87How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 78Passenger Sensing System ....................... 80Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 86What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 77

Antenna, Backglass ..................................... 243

Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystem .................................................... 244

Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 251Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ......... 195Appearance Care

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 387Care of Safety Belts ................................ 385Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 389Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 385Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 382Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 383Finish Care .............................................. 386Finish Damage ......................................... 388Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 384Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 388Tires ........................................................ 388Underbody Maintenance ........................... 388Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 389Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 385Weatherstrips ........................................... 385Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 386

Audio System .............................................. 217Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 241Backglass Antenna ................................... 243Care of Your CD Player ........................... 243

439

Audio System (cont.)Care of Your CDs .................................... 243Radio with CD ......................................... 220Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................ 238Setting the Time ...................................... 218Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 241Understanding Radio Reception ............... 242XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 244

Automatic Climate Control System ............... 181Automatic Headlamp System ....................... 172Automatic Transaxle

Fluid ........................................................ 319Operation ................................................. 122

BBackglass Antenna ...................................... 243Battery ........................................................ 338

Run-Down Protection ............................... 175Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 270Brake

Emergencies ............................................ 253Brakes ........................................................ 335

System Warning Light .............................. 194Braking ....................................................... 250Braking in Emergencies ............................... 253Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 116

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 344Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 344License Plate Lamps ................................ 346Replacement Bulbs .................................. 346Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,

Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps ........... 344Buying New Tires ........................................ 363

CCalibration ................................................... 133California Fuel ............................................. 300California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 298Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 401Carbon Monoxide .............. 106, 130, 274, 287Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 385Your CD Player ........................................ 243Your CDs ................................................. 243

CD, MP3 ..................................................... 229Center Console Storage Area ...................... 153Chains, Tire ................................................. 369Charging System Light ................................ 193Check

Engine Light ............................................ 199Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 306

440

Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 389Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 47Infants and Young Children ........................ 43Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 54Older Children ........................................... 40Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................. 62Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 64Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 52

CleaningAluminum Wheels .................................... 387Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 385Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 383Finish Care .............................................. 386Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 382Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 384Tires ........................................................ 388Underbody Maintenance ........................... 388Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 385Weatherstrips ........................................... 385Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 386

Climate Control System ............................... 177Automatic ................................................. 181Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 186

Clock .......................................................... 218Collision Damage Repair ............................. 430Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 36Compact Spare Tire .................................... 381Compass ..................................................... 133Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 112Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 250Convenience Net ......................................... 153Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 198Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 198Heater, Engine ......................................... 120Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 325

Cooling System ........................................... 328Cruise Control ............................................. 167Cruise Control Light .................................... 203Cupholder(s) ................................................ 152Customer Assistance Information

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users ......................... 426

Customer Assistance Offices .................... 426

441

Customer Assistance Information (cont.)Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 422GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 427Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn .......... 434Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 434Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 434Roadside Assistance Program .................. 427Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 435

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 171Defensive Driving ........................................ 246Delayed Headlamps .................................... 171Delayed Locking .......................................... 103Disc, MP3 ................................................... 229Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 298Dome Lamp ................................................ 174Door

Delayed Locking ...................................... 103Door Ajar Reminder ................................. 103Locks ....................................................... 102Power Door Locks ................................... 103

Door (cont.)Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 104Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 105

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 24

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 204DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 205DIC Vehicle Personalization ..................... 211DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 206

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 264City .......................................................... 268Defensive ................................................. 246Drunken ................................................... 247Freeway ................................................... 269Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 272In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 266Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 278Winter ...................................................... 274

EEDR ............................................................ 436Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 391Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 396

442

Electrical System (cont.)Fuses ...................................................... 392Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 393Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 392Rear Compartment Fuse Block ................ 398Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 392

Electronic Stability Control ........................... 256Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 317Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 199Coolant .................................................... 322Coolant Heater ......................................... 120Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 198Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 198Drive Belt Routing .................................... 417Engine Compartment Overview ................ 308Exhaust ................................................... 130Oil ........................................................... 312Oil Life System ........................................ 315Overheated Protection Operating Mode .... 327Overheating ............................................. 325Running While Parked ............................. 131Starting .................................................... 118

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ................ 255Warning Light ........................................... 197

Entry/Exit Lighting ....................................... 174Event Data Recorders ................................. 437Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 39

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 317Finish Damage ............................................ 388Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 162Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 164Flat Tire ...................................................... 369Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 370Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 379Fluid

Power Steering ........................................ 332Windshield Washer .................................. 334

Fog LampFog .......................................................... 173

Folding Rear Seat ......................................... 16Fuel ............................................................ 299

Additives .................................................. 300California Fuel .......................................... 300Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 305Filling Your Tank ...................................... 302Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 301

443

Fuel (cont.)Gage ....................................................... 203Gasoline Octane ...................................... 299Gasoline Specifications ............................ 300

Fuses .......................................................... 392Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 396Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 393Rear Compartment Fuse Block ................ 398Windshield Wiper ..................................... 392

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 198Fuel ......................................................... 203Speedometer ........................................... 189Tachometer .............................................. 189

Garage Door Opener ................................... 140Gasoline

Octane ..................................................... 299Specifications ........................................... 300

Glove Box ................................................... 152GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 427

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 162Head Restraints ............................................ 15Headlamps .................................................. 170

Bulb Replacement .................................... 344Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 171Delayed ................................................... 171Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 164Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 344High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 164On Reminder ........................................... 170

Headlamps Off in Park (P) .......................... 171Heated Seats ................................................ 11Heater ................................................ 177, 181Highbeam On Light ..................................... 203Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 271Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 272Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 306Release ................................................... 306

Horn ............................................................ 162How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 23

444

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 117Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 43Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 356Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 160Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 173Cluster ..................................................... 188

JJump Starting .............................................. 339

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 94Keys ............................................................. 93

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 349Lamps

Dome ....................................................... 174Overhead Console Reading ..................... 175Trunk ....................................................... 175

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 54

License Plate Lamps ................................... 346Lift Seat, Power ............................................ 16Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 190Antilock Brake System Warning ................ 195Brake System Warning ............................. 194Charging System ..................................... 193Cruise Control .......................................... 203Electronic StabiliTrak® Control

Indicator ............................................... 197Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 198Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Warning Light ....................................... 197Highbeam On .......................................... 203Low Tire Pressure Warning Light ............. 196Malfunction Indicator ................................ 199Oil Pressure ............................................. 202Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 191Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 190Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 189Security ................................................... 202TCS Warning Light .................................. 196Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning ................................................ 196

445

LightingEntry/Exit ................................................. 174Parade Dimming ...................................... 175

Lights .......................................................... 170Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 164High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 164On Reminder ........................................... 170

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 279Lockout Protection ....................................... 106Locks

Delayed Locking ...................................... 103Door ........................................................ 102Lockout Protection ................................... 106Power Door ............................................. 103Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 104Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 105

Loss of Control ........................................... 263Lumbar

Manual Controls ......................................... 10

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 408At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 412At Least Once a Month ............................ 412

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)At Least Once a Year .............................. 413Introduction .............................................. 404Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 409Maintenance Record ................................ 418Maintenance Requirements ...................... 404Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 416Owner Checks and Services .................... 411Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 415Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 406Using ....................................................... 404Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 404

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 199Manual Lumbar Controls ............................... 10Manual Seats .................................................. 9Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 206Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview withOnStar® and Compass ......................... 133

Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 132Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 132Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 135

MP3 ............................................................ 229MyGMLink.com ............................................ 425

446

NNavigation System, Privacy ......................... 438New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 116Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 416

OOdometer .................................................... 189Odometer, Trip ............................................ 189Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 261Oil

Engine ..................................................... 312Pressure Light .......................................... 202

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 315Older Children, Restraints ............................. 40Online Owner Center ................................... 425OnStar, Privacy ........................................... 438OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 135Operation, Universal Home

Remote System .............................. 140, 145Other Warning Devices ................................ 162Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 186Outlets

Accessory Power ..................................... 176Outside

Power Mirrors .......................................... 135

Overhead Console Reading Lamps ............. 175Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ....................................... 327Owner Checks and Services ....................... 411Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 388Parade Dimming .......................................... 175Park Brake .................................................. 127Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 128Shifting Out of ......................................... 129

Park (P) Headlamps Off in Park (P) ............ 171Parking

Over Things That Burn ............................ 130Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 191Passenger Sensing System ........................... 80Passing ....................................................... 261PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 114PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 114Power

Door Locks .............................................. 103Electrical System ..................................... 392Lift Seat ..................................................... 16

447

Power (cont.)Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 118Seat .......................................................... 10Steering Fluid .......................................... 332Windows .................................................. 109

Pressure Cap .............................................. 325Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 39Privacy ........................................................ 436

Event Data Recorders .............................. 437Navigation System ................................... 438OnStar ..................................................... 438Radio Frequency Identification .................. 438

Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 104

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ... 22

RRadio Frequency Identification (RFID),

Privacy ..................................................... 438Radios ........................................................ 217

Care of Your CD Player ........................... 243Care of Your CDs .................................... 243Radio with CD ......................................... 220Rear Seat Audio ...................................... 238

Radios (cont.)Setting the Time ...................................... 218Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 241Understanding Reception ......................... 242

Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 105Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 36Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 238Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 33Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with OnStar® and Compass ..................... 133Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 132Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 132Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 12Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 415Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 284Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 94Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................... 96Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire .......................................... 374Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 372Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 346Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 434Saturn ...................................................... 434United States Government ....................... 434

448

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 88Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 89Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 118Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 32Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 427Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 278Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 417Running the Engine While Parked ............... 131

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 190Pretensioners ............................................. 39Reminder Light ........................................ 189

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 385Driver Position ........................................... 24How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 23Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 22Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 36

Safety Belts (cont.)Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 33Right Front Passenger Position .................. 32Safety Belt Extender .................................. 39Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 32Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 18Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 31

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 406Seats

Head Restraints ......................................... 15Heated Seats ............................................. 11Manual Lumbar .......................................... 10Power Lift Seat .......................................... 16Power Seats .............................................. 10Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 12Split Folding Rear Seat .............................. 16

Securing a Child RestraintRear Seat Position ..................................... 62Right Front Seat Position ........................... 64

Security Light .............................................. 202Service ........................................................ 297

Accessories and Modifications .................. 297Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ..................................... 299

449

Service (cont.)California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 298Doing Your Own Work ............................. 298Engine Soon Light ................................... 199Publications Ordering Information ............. 435

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 86Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 388Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 128Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 129Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 31Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 164Spare Tire

Compact .................................................. 381Installing .................................................. 374Removing ................................................ 372Storing ..................................................... 379

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 401Speedometer ............................................... 189Split Folding Rear Seat ................................. 16StabiliTrak® Control Indicator Light,

Electronic ................................................. 197Starting Your Engine ................................... 118Steering ...................................................... 259Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 241

Storage AreasCenter Console Storage Area ................... 153Convenience Net ..................................... 153Cupholder(s) ............................................ 152Glove Box ................................................ 152

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 278Sun Visors .................................................. 111Sunroof ....................................................... 154System Identification, Universal Home

Remote System ....................................... 139

TTachometer ................................................. 189Taillamps

Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps ............................. 344

TCS Warning Light ...................................... 196Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 241Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 112

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 112PASS-Key® III+ ........................................ 114PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................ 114

Time, Setting ............................................... 218

450

Tires ........................................................... 348Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 387Buying New Tires ..................................... 363Chains ..................................................... 369Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 370Cleaning .................................................. 388Compact Spare Tire ................................. 381Different Size ........................................... 365If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 369Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 356Inspection and Rotation ............................ 362Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 374Pressure Monitor System ......................... 357Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 374Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 372Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 379Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 349Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 353Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 366Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 367Wheel Replacement ................................. 367When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 363

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 284Towing a Trailer ....................................... 287Your Vehicle ............................................. 284

TractionControl System (TCS) .............................. 253Control System Warning Light .................. 196Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ............. 255Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Warning Light ....................................... 197Trip Odometer ............................................. 189Trunk .......................................................... 106Trunk Lamps ............................................... 175Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 164Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 163

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 242Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 366Universal Home Remote System ................. 140

Operation ........................................ 140, 145System Identification ................................ 139

451

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 250Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 279Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ............ 436Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) .......................................... 390Service Parts Identification Label .............. 391

Vehicle PersonalizationDIC .......................................................... 211

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 186Visors .......................................................... 111

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 187Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 206Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 162Other Warning Devices ............................ 162Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 367Different Size ........................................... 365Replacement ............................................ 367

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 52Windows ..................................................... 108

Power ...................................................... 109Windshield

Washer .................................................... 166Washer Fluid ........................................... 334Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 347Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 386Wiper Fuses ............................................ 392Wipers ..................................................... 165

Winter Driving ............................................. 274

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 236XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 244

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 404

452

2007 Saturn AURA Owner Manual M - my.gm.com · How to Use This Manual Many people read the owner...

Documents

Transcript of 2007 Saturn AURA Owner Manual M - my.gm.com · How to Use This Manual Many people read the owner...